1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
68 \font_roman "default" "default"
69 \font_sans "default" "default"
70 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
71 \font_math "auto" "auto"
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \font_sf_scale 100 100
77 \font_tt_scale 100 100
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation skip
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes false
145 \output_changes false
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Note Note
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
504 Code box prevent that the term
505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
513 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
514 More about \SpecialChar TeX
515 Code is described in section
520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
522 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
526 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
527 is explained in section
532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
534 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
544 \begin_inset Index idx
547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
548 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
554 See section 5.1 of the
558 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
562 \begin_layout Chapter
563 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
567 \begin_layout Section
568 Basic File Operations
569 \begin_inset Index idx
572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
581 \begin_layout Standard
586 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
587 in addition to some more advanced operations:
590 \begin_layout Itemize
612 \begin_layout Itemize
628 arg "buffer-new-template"
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Itemize
714 arg "buffer-write-as"
720 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Standard
749 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
750 a few minor differences.
753 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
764 command lists the available templates.
765 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
766 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
767 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
775 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
782 \begin_layout Standard
783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
815 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
816 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
817 is just that — a big, blank space.
825 \begin_layout Standard
846 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
851 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
854 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
872 will reload the document from disk.
873 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
874 and want to restore it to the last save.
883 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
884 them as your changes.
887 \begin_layout Section
888 Basic Editing Features
889 \begin_inset Index idx
892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
901 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
908 \begin_layout Standard
909 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
910 can perform cut and paste operations
911 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
912 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
913 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
914 editing features and how to access
916 We will start with cut and paste.
919 \begin_layout Standard
920 As you might expect, the
924 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
925 various other editing features.
926 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
930 \begin_layout Itemize
936 \begin_inset Index idx
939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
968 \begin_layout Itemize
974 \begin_inset Index idx
977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1006 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset Index idx
1015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_layout Itemize
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 \begin_layout Itemize
1054 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_layout Itemize
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1068 \begin_inset space ~
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1086 \begin_inset Index idx
1089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1104 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1114 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1120 \begin_layout Standard
1121 The first three are self-explanatory.
1122 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1123 and other programs by
1144 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1145 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1150 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1151 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1152 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1153 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1154 into individual cells.
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1164 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1168 \begin_layout Standard
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1177 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1179 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1194 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1195 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1196 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1202 \begin_inset space \space{}
1205 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1206 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1231 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1232 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1234 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1238 \begin_inset space ~
1243 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1244 start a new paragraph.
1245 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1246 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1251 \begin_inset space ~
1254 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1271 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1274 paste from the primary selection.
1275 This is normally the currently selected text.
1278 \begin_layout Standard
1281 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1305 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1311 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1314 \begin_inset space ~
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 button to skip the current word.
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1337 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1341 \begin_inset space ~
1346 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1348 If the toggle is set, searching for
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1360 will not match the word
1361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1375 Match whole words only
1377 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1378 to only find complete words, e.
1379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 offers also an advanced
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1415 \begin_inset space ~
1420 feature that is described in sec.
1421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1427 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1435 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1436 \begin_inset space \space{}
1440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1448 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1450 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1455 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1462 \begin_layout Standard
1466 arg "inset-select-all"
1469 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1470 When the cursor is inside an inset
1473 arg "inset-select-all"
1476 selects the content of the inset.
1480 arg "inset-select-all"
1483 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1488 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1491 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1495 \begin_layout Section
1497 \begin_inset Index idx
1500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1507 \begin_inset Index idx
1510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1519 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1529 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1532 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1535 or the toolbar button
1541 to undo some mistake.
1542 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1547 or the toolbar button
1554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1561 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1565 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1569 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1578 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1579 This is a consequence of the 100
1580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1583 step undo limit mentioned above.
1586 \begin_layout Standard
1595 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1597 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1601 \begin_layout Section
1603 \begin_inset Index idx
1606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1615 \begin_layout Standard
1616 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1619 \begin_layout Enumerate
1624 \begin_layout Itemize
1629 once anywhere in the edit window.
1630 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1634 \begin_layout Enumerate
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1646 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1652 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1653 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1656 \begin_layout Itemize
1657 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1667 \begin_layout Enumerate
1668 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1672 \begin_layout Standard
1673 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1674 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1678 \begin_layout Section
1680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1682 name "sec:Navigating"
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1699 \begin_layout Standard
1701 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1704 \begin_layout Itemize
1709 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1710 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1713 \begin_layout Itemize
1714 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1716 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1718 \begin_inset space ~
1723 or by the toolbar button
1726 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1732 \begin_layout Itemize
1733 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1735 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1738 and use the same menu to return to them.
1739 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1746 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1751 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1752 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1754 \begin_inset space ~
1759 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1760 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1761 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1762 your last editing position.
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1770 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1774 \begin_layout Subsection
1776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1778 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1785 \begin_layout Standard
1786 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1787 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1788 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1796 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1800 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1812 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1818 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1819 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1820 dialog and to modify the citation.
1823 \begin_layout Standard
1824 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1826 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1827 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1835 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1838 \begin_layout Standard
1839 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1840 you further to control the display.
1845 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1846 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1852 option keeps it in the current view state.
1853 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1861 3, the subsections of sections
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1865 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1870 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1885 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1888 \begin_layout Standard
1895 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1896 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1910 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1911 So, for example, you can move section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1916 \begin_inset space ~
1919 2.4 or after section
1920 \begin_inset space ~
1925 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1938 (or the corresponding key bindings
1946 ) you can change the level of sections.
1947 So you can for example make section
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \begin_inset space ~
1962 \begin_layout Section
1963 Input/Word Completion
1964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1966 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1971 \begin_inset Index idx
1974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_inset Index idx
1984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2017 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2019 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2020 is used to propose completions.
2023 \begin_layout Standard
2024 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2027 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2032 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2039 \begin_inset space ~
2043 \begin_inset space ~
2048 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2052 \begin_inset space ~
2057 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2058 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2062 \begin_inset space ~
2068 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2069 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2070 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2071 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2074 \begin_layout Standard
2076 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2077 completions available.
2082 key to accept a proposed completion.
2083 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2084 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2085 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2092 \begin_layout Standard
2093 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2094 ing options for text.
2095 The special math option
2099 enables characters to be composed.
2100 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2101 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2104 , you can then input the characters
2105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2116 to a formula to get it.
2117 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2118 of the math toolbar.
2119 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2123 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2124 's installation folder.
2125 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2134 \begin_layout Section
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_inset Index idx
2181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2227 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2230 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2234 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2241 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2248 \begin_layout Standard
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2260 \begin_inset space ~
2281 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2285 \begin_layout Labeling
2286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2290 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2291 LatexCommand nomenclature
2293 description "Tabulator key"
2299 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2301 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2308 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2315 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2319 , especially section
2320 \begin_inset space ~
2324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2326 reference "subsec:Lists"
2332 If you are still confused, look in the
2337 \begin_inset Newline newline
2345 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2346 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2350 \begin_layout Labeling
2351 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2355 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2356 LatexCommand nomenclature
2358 description "Escape key"
2365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2372 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2373 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset space ~
2387 \begin_inset space ~
2394 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2395 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2399 \begin_layout Standard
2400 There are three modifier keys:
2403 \begin_layout Labeling
2404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2422 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2423 LatexCommand nomenclature
2425 description "Control key"
2429 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2430 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2434 \begin_layout Itemize
2443 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2446 \begin_layout Itemize
2455 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2458 \begin_layout Itemize
2467 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2471 \begin_layout Labeling
2472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2491 LatexCommand nomenclature
2493 description "Shift key"
2497 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2498 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2501 \begin_layout Labeling
2502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Alt or Meta key"
2527 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2528 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2529 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2535 \begin_inset Newline newline
2538 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2540 menu accelerator keys
2543 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2544 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2549 For example, the sequence
2550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2560 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset space ~
2599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2609 \begin_layout Standard
2614 manual lists all other things bound to the
2622 \begin_layout Standard
2623 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2625 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2626 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2627 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2628 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2629 The \SpecialChar LyX
2630 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2631 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2632 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2634 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2650 followed by a capital
2657 \begin_layout Chapter
2660 \begin_inset Index idx
2663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2673 \begin_layout Section
2675 \begin_inset Index idx
2678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2687 \begin_layout Subsection
2691 \begin_layout Standard
2692 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2693 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2694 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2695 numbering schemes, and so on.
2696 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2697 and format the title of your document differently.
2700 \begin_layout Standard
2705 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2706 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2707 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2708 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2709 picks one for you by default.
2710 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2713 \begin_layout Subsection
2715 \begin_inset Index idx
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2727 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2735 You can select a class using the
2737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2738 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2742 \begin_inset Index idx
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2752 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2760 \begin_layout Standard
2761 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Article for basic articles
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Report for basic reports
2774 \begin_layout Description
2775 Book for writing a book
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 Letter for US-style letters
2782 \begin_layout Standard
2783 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2784 only uses if you have installed
2785 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2786 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2787 distributions will include
2789 Here are some of the classes.
2790 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2792 Special Document Classes
2801 \begin_layout Description
2802 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2817 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2818 There are three article layouts available.
2819 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2820 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2821 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2822 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2827 sequential numbering
2828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2832 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2833 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2834 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2837 \begin_layout Description
2838 Beamer Layout for presentations
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2843 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2844 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2845 with \SpecialChar LyX
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2853 \begin_layout Description
2855 \begin_inset space ~
2858 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 Foils Used to make transparencies
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2871 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2872 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2873 with \SpecialChar LyX
2877 \begin_layout Description
2878 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2879 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2890 \begin_layout Description
2891 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2892 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2893 (Is used by this document.)
2896 \begin_layout Description
2897 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2900 \begin_layout Description
2901 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2904 \begin_layout Description
2909 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2910 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2912 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Slides Used to make transparencies
2920 \begin_layout Description
2922 \begin_inset space ~
2925 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2926 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2933 \begin_layout Standard
2934 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2936 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2942 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2943 of the document classes.
2946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2956 \begin_inset Index idx
2959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2976 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2977 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2979 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2985 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2990 , are highly specialized.
2992 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2993 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2994 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2995 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2996 by some document class.
2997 There are just too many of them.
2998 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3010 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3011 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3012 document class for a new file.
3014 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3019 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3028 manual for information on how to install them.
3029 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3035 \begin_layout Standard
3036 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3037 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3038 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3039 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 class files to be used for dissertation
3041 s submitted to those universities.
3042 The \SpecialChar LyX
3043 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3045 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3049 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3055 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3062 name "subsec:Modules"
3067 \begin_inset Index idx
3070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3081 chosen document class.
3082 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3083 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3094 \begin_inset Index idx
3097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3104 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3110 packages or file format converters that are not always
3111 installed by default.
3113 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3114 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3115 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3116 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3118 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3119 file without the missing prerequisites.
3120 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3121 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3132 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3142 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3163 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3165 will advise you about these things.
3173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3177 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3182 \begin_inset Index idx
3185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 Document ! Local Layout
3194 \begin_layout Standard
3195 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3196 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 : They are intended to be used in
3198 a variety of different documents.
3199 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3200 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3201 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3202 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3203 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3205 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3223 manual for information on how to use it.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_layout Standard
3231 Each class has a default set of options.
3232 Here's a quick table describing them:
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3242 \begin_layout Standard
3244 \begin_inset Tabular
3245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3246 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3249 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3250 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3251 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3705 \begin_layout Standard
3706 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3712 \begin_layout Standard
3713 You're probably also wondering what
3714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3718 \begin_inset space ~
3722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3726 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3727 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3732 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3737 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3747 headings, there are also
3755 headings, and so on.
3756 We will describe these headings fully in section
3757 \begin_inset space ~
3761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3763 reference "subsec:Headings"
3770 \begin_layout Subsection
3772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3774 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3779 \begin_inset Index idx
3782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 \begin_inset Index idx
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3801 \begin_layout Standard
3802 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3819 \begin_inset space ~
3824 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3826 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3827 doesn't support special options you want to
3828 use for your document.
3829 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3830 -class and its options, you have to read
3834 \begin_layout Standard
3838 \begin_inset space ~
3845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3851 \begin_inset space ~
3856 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3857 You can choose between the following five options:
3860 \begin_layout Labeling
3861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3866 Use default page style of current class.
3869 \begin_layout Labeling
3870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3875 No page numbers or headings.
3878 \begin_layout Labeling
3879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3887 \begin_layout Labeling
3888 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3893 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3894 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3895 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3896 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3899 \begin_layout Labeling
3900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3905 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3906 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3912 \begin_inset Index idx
3915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 -packages ! fancyhdr
3923 How they are defined is explained in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3939 \begin_inset space ~
3943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3945 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3952 \begin_layout Subsection
3953 Paper Size and Orientation
3954 \begin_inset Index idx
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 Document ! Paper size
3964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3966 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 You can find the following options in the menu
3977 \begin_inset space ~
3984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset Index idx
3991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4000 \begin_layout Labeling
4001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4010 What size paper to print on.
4015 \begin_layout Itemize
4021 \begin_layout Itemize
4027 \begin_layout Itemize
4033 \begin_layout Itemize
4039 \begin_layout Itemize
4042 US letter, US legal, US executive
4045 \begin_layout Itemize
4051 \begin_layout Itemize
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 To choose whether to output as
4075 \begin_layout Labeling
4076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4080 \begin_inset space ~
4085 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4086 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4093 name "subsec:Margins"
4098 \begin_inset Index idx
4101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4108 \begin_inset Index idx
4111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 \begin_layout Standard
4121 Paper margins are set in the menu
4123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4127 \begin_inset Index idx
4130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4139 \begin_layout Standard
4140 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4141 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4142 the paper format and the font size into account.
4145 \begin_layout Subsection
4149 \begin_layout Standard
4150 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4156 That includes the paragraph environments.
4157 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4158 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4159 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4161 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4170 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4172 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4173 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4174 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4177 \begin_layout Section
4178 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4179 \begin_inset Index idx
4182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4183 Paragraph ! Indentation
4191 \begin_layout Subsection
4193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4195 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4202 \begin_layout Standard
4203 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4204 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4207 \begin_layout Standard
4208 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4209 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4210 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4211 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4215 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4221 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4222 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4223 language than English.
4225 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4228 \begin_layout Standard
4229 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4230 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4231 into \SpecialChar LyX
4233 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4236 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4238 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4239 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4240 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4247 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4248 goes to produce a printable file.
4253 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4255 gives you the ability globally to change
4259 these pre-coded spacings.
4260 We will explain more later.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4264 Paragraph Separation
4265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4267 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 Paragraph ! Separation
4284 \begin_layout Standard
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4300 \begin_inset space ~
4307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4311 \begin_inset Index idx
4314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4323 \begin_layout Subsection
4327 \begin_layout Standard
4328 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 dialog and toggle the
4341 \begin_inset space ~
4346 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4349 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4353 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4354 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4360 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4363 \begin_layout Subsection
4365 \begin_inset Index idx
4368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4369 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4377 \begin_layout Standard
4380 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4384 \begin_inset Index idx
4387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4396 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4400 \begin_inset space ~
4409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4416 \begin_inset Index idx
4419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 -packages ! setspace
4426 installed to use this feature.
4431 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4433 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset space ~
4440 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4441 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4444 \begin_layout Section
4445 Paragraph Environments
4446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4448 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4453 \begin_inset Index idx
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Paragraph ! Environments
4463 \begin_inset Index idx
4466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4467 Paragraph environments|(
4475 \begin_layout Subsection
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4480 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4483 \begin_layout Standard
4502 \begin_inset Newline newline
4505 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4507 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4508 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4509 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4518 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 A paragraph environment is simply a
4523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4530 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4531 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4532 scheme, labels, and so on.
4533 Additionally, you can
4534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4541 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4542 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4543 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4544 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4546 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4548 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4551 \begin_layout Standard
4552 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4553 \begin_inset Graphics
4554 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4560 at the left end of the toolbar.
4562 will change the environment of the
4566 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4567 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4568 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4572 \begin_layout Standard
4581 create a new paragraph using the
4585 paragraph environment.
4587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4594 because if you are in one of these environments:
4597 \begin_layout Itemize
4603 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 \begin_layout Itemize
4615 \begin_layout Itemize
4621 \begin_layout Itemize
4627 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Itemize
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4641 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4645 , rather than resetting it to
4650 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4651 \begin_inset space ~
4655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4657 reference "sec:Nesting"
4664 \begin_layout Subsection
4668 \begin_layout Standard
4669 The default paragraph environment is
4674 It creates a plain paragraph.
4676 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4677 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4678 this manual) are in the
4685 \begin_layout Standard
4686 You can nest a paragraph using the
4690 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4698 \begin_layout Subsection
4700 \begin_inset Index idx
4703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4714 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4723 for thanks or contact information.
4724 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 places all of this on a separate page
4726 along with today's date.
4727 For other types of documents, the title
4728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4735 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4741 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4755 Here's how you use them:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the title of your document in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 Put the author name in the
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4776 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4782 Note that using this environment is optional.
4783 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4784 will automatically insert today's date.
4785 If you don't want a date, use the option
4787 Suppress default date on front page
4791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4792 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4794 \begin_inset space ~
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 You can use footnotes to insert
4804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4811 or contact information.
4814 \begin_layout Subsection
4816 \begin_inset Index idx
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4828 name "subsec:Headings"
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4838 takes care of the numbering for you.
4841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4843 \begin_inset Index idx
4846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4847 Section headings ! Numbered
4855 \begin_layout Standard
4856 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4860 \begin_layout Enumerate
4866 \begin_layout Enumerate
4872 \begin_layout Enumerate
4878 \begin_layout Enumerate
4884 \begin_layout Enumerate
4890 \begin_layout Enumerate
4896 \begin_layout Enumerate
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4905 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4906 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4909 \begin_layout Standard
4910 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4911 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4912 You group the book into chapters.
4914 does a similar grouping:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 is divided into either
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4945 \begin_layout Itemize
4957 \begin_layout Itemize
4969 \begin_layout Itemize
4981 \begin_layout Itemize
4993 \begin_layout Standard
4994 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 Not all document types use the
5006 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5011 is the top-level heading.
5019 \begin_layout Standard
5024 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5025 labels it with its number,
5026 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5028 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5042 \begin_inset Index idx
5045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5046 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5054 \begin_layout Standard
5055 The unnumbered section headings have a
5056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5063 at the end of their name.
5064 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5065 the table of contents, see section
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5080 Changing the Numbering
5081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5083 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5090 \begin_layout Standard
5091 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5092 in the Table of Contents.
5093 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5095 Just as certain classes start with
5109 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5119 This is something you can change.
5122 \begin_layout Standard
5125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5129 \begin_inset Index idx
5132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5141 \begin_inset space ~
5145 \begin_inset space ~
5150 you will see two counters.
5155 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5156 numbers a section heading.
5157 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5162 Short Titles of Headings
5163 \begin_inset Index idx
5166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5167 Section headings ! Short titles
5173 \begin_inset Argument 1
5176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5185 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5192 \begin_layout Standard
5193 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5194 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5195 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5196 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5201 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5202 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5203 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5204 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5209 \begin_inset space ~
5215 This will insert a box labeled
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset space ~
5224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5227 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5228 This also works for captions inside floats.
5229 There can only be one short title per title.
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 \begin_layout Standard
5241 The following information applies to all section headings:
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5252 \begin_layout Itemize
5253 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5256 \begin_layout Itemize
5257 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5260 \begin_layout Subsection
5264 \begin_layout Standard
5266 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5280 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5281 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5282 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5283 the text they contain.
5284 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5292 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5295 \begin_layout Standard
5296 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5305 when you start a new paragraph.
5306 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5310 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5311 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5312 have to change back to the
5316 environment yourself.
5319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5328 \begin_inset Index idx
5331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5342 time for the differences.
5351 are identical except for one difference:
5355 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5364 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 Here's an example of the
5381 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5383 See – no indentation!
5387 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5388 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5389 the other paragraph.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 Here's another example, this time in the
5400 \begin_layout Quotation
5406 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5407 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5408 the first line, then
5412 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5416 you were quoting other text.
5419 \begin_layout Quotation
5420 Here's a new paragraph.
5421 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5422 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 As the examples show,
5430 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5431 They should put quotes in the
5436 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5440 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5455 \begin_inset Index idx
5458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_layout Standard
5479 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5485 \begin_inset Newline newline
5488 Which I did not rehearse!
5492 It could be much worse.
5493 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5495 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5496 indented a bit more than the first.
5497 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5503 \begin_inset Newline newline
5506 And make things look fine
5507 \begin_inset Newline newline
5513 arg "newline-insert newline"
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5524 does not indent both margins.
5525 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5526 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5529 arg "newline-insert newline"
5535 \begin_layout Subsection
5537 \begin_inset Index idx
5540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5556 \begin_layout Standard
5558 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5568 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5569 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5578 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5579 lets you provide your own label.
5580 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5581 describing some general features of all four of them.
5584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5591 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5592 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5601 reset the environment to
5605 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5606 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5607 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5611 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5615 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5622 \begin_layout Standard
5623 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5624 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5625 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5627 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5628 you read all of section
5629 \begin_inset space ~
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5635 reference "sec:Nesting"
5642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5644 \begin_inset Index idx
5647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5663 \begin_layout Standard
5664 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5668 paragraph environment.
5669 It has the following properties:
5672 \begin_layout Itemize
5673 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5677 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5682 \begin_layout Itemize
5683 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5688 The items can have any length.
5690 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5691 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 environment inside another
5707 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5711 \begin_layout Itemize
5712 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5720 \begin_layout Itemize
5722 \begin_inset space ~
5726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5728 reference "sec:Nesting"
5732 for a full explanation of nesting.
5736 \begin_layout Standard
5737 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5746 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5751 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5754 \begin_layout Itemize
5755 The label for the first level
5759 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5763 \begin_layout Itemize
5764 The label for the second level is a dash.
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5773 \begin_layout Itemize
5774 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5778 \begin_layout Itemize
5779 Back out to the third level.
5783 \begin_layout Itemize
5784 Back to the second level.
5788 \begin_layout Itemize
5789 Back to the outermost level.
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5793 These are the default labels for an
5798 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5803 dialog in the submenu
5808 \begin_inset Index idx
5811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5821 \begin_layout Standard
5822 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5823 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5831 reference "sec:Nesting"
5838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5852 name "sec:Enumerate"
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5864 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5865 It has these properties:
5868 \begin_layout Enumerate
5869 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5873 \begin_layout Enumerate
5874 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5878 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5888 environment resets the counter to one.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5904 \begin_layout Enumerate
5905 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5906 Items can have any length.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5913 \begin_layout Enumerate
5914 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5917 \begin_layout Enumerate
5918 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5931 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5933 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5934 labels the four different levels in an
5941 \begin_layout Enumerate
5942 The first level of an
5946 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5950 \begin_layout Enumerate
5951 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5955 \begin_layout Enumerate
5956 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5960 \begin_layout Enumerate
5961 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5964 \begin_layout Enumerate
5965 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5970 \begin_layout Enumerate
5971 Back to the third level
5975 \begin_layout Enumerate
5976 Back to the second level.
5980 \begin_layout Enumerate
5981 Back to the outermost level.
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5989 environment, see section
5990 \begin_inset space ~
5994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5996 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6001 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6006 There is more to nesting
6010 environments than we've stated here.
6011 You should read section
6012 \begin_inset space ~
6016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6018 reference "sec:Nesting"
6022 to learn more about nesting.
6025 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6027 \begin_inset Index idx
6030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6044 list has no fixed label.
6045 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6054 of the first line as the label.
6058 \begin_layout Description
6059 Example: This is an example of the
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6068 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6072 \begin_layout Standard
6074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6081 it is meant that the first usage of the
6085 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6087 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6095 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6101 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6103 \begin_inset space ~
6109 \begin_inset space ~
6113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6115 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6119 for more information.) Here is an example:
6122 \begin_layout Description
6124 \begin_inset space ~
6127 Example: This one shows how to use a
6130 \begin_inset space ~
6142 \begin_layout Description
6143 Usage: You should use the
6147 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6148 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6150 It's not a good idea to use a
6154 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6155 You're better off using
6167 paragraphs into them.
6170 \begin_layout Description
6171 Nesting: You can nest
6175 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6179 \begin_layout Standard
6180 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6181 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6182 them from the first line.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6204 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6205 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6218 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6220 Here are its properties:
6223 \begin_layout Labeling
6224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6226 \begin_inset space ~
6229 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6238 of each line as the item label.
6243 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6244 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6245 space as described above.
6248 \begin_layout Labeling
6249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6250 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6251 uses different margins for the item label and the
6252 body of the item text.
6253 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6254 label width plus a little extra space.
6258 \begin_layout Labeling
6259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 width \SpecialChar LyX
6265 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6266 If the label width is larger, the label
6267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6274 into the first line.
6275 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6276 margin of the rest of the item text.
6279 \begin_layout Labeling
6280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6282 \begin_inset space ~
6285 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6290 environment has the same left margin.
6291 \begin_inset Newline newline
6294 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6297 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6299 \begin_inset space ~
6304 dialog (toolbar button
6307 arg "layout-paragraph"
6314 \begin_inset space ~
6319 determines the default label width.
6320 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6329 multiple times instead.
6330 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6340 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6343 \begin_inset space ~
6348 every time you alter a label in a
6353 \begin_inset Newline newline
6356 The predefined default width is the length of
6357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6365 \begin_inset space ~
6371 \begin_layout Standard
6376 list the same way as the
6380 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6386 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6390 \begin_layout Standard
6395 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6396 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6404 reference "sec:Nesting"
6408 to learn about nesting.
6411 \begin_layout Standard
6412 There is yet another feature of the
6416 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6417 left-justifies the item labels by
6419 You can use additional
6423 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6424 justifies the item label.
6429 are documented in section
6430 \begin_inset space ~
6434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6436 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6441 Here are some examples:
6444 \begin_layout Labeling
6445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6446 Left The default for
6453 \begin_layout Labeling
6454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6462 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6465 \begin_layout Labeling
6466 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6467 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6471 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6478 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6481 \begin_layout Subsection
6483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6485 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6490 \begin_inset Index idx
6493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6502 \begin_layout Standard
6503 The features described in this section require that the module
6505 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6507 is loaded in the document settings.
6508 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6514 \begin_inset Index idx
6517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6519 -packages ! enumitem
6527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6528 Custom Enumerate Lists
6529 \begin_inset Index idx
6532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6533 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6541 \begin_layout Standard
6543 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6549 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6550 There you add the command
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6574 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6575 Code, look at section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6595 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6602 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6603 For capital Roman numerals replace
6615 in the command above.
6616 For Arabic numerals use
6624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6631 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 You can only number 26
6657 \begin_inset space ~
6660 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6669 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6670 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6673 \begin_layout Standard
6674 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6678 \begin_inset Argument 1
6681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Enumerate
6708 \begin_inset Argument 1
6711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 \begin_layout Enumerate
6739 \begin_layout Enumerate
6740 \begin_inset Argument 1
6743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Enumerate
6768 \begin_inset Argument 1
6771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6797 \begin_layout Standard
6798 For this list these commands were used:
6801 \begin_layout Standard
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6828 \begin_inset Newline newline
6838 \begin_layout Standard
6845 makes the label emphasized and
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6863 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6864 lists until you change the definition.
6872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6874 \begin_inset Index idx
6877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6886 \begin_layout Standard
6887 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6890 \begin_layout Enumerate
6891 \begin_inset Argument 1
6894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_inset Note Note
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6917 goes back to default numbering
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6933 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6937 \begin_layout Standard
6938 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6943 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6944 to indicate that it is a resumed
6945 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6946 , but in the output.
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6950 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6968 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6970 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6971 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6972 of a normal enumeration.
6973 There, insert the command
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6982 \begin_layout Standard
6987 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6991 \begin_layout Enumerate
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7000 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7003 \begin_layout Enumerate
7004 \begin_inset Argument 1
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 This enumeration starts at 4
7026 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7028 \begin_inset Index idx
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7040 \begin_layout Standard
7041 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7043 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7046 \begin_layout Itemize
7050 \begin_layout Itemize
7051 with standard spacing
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7057 Add there the command
7061 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7064 \begin_layout Itemize
7065 \begin_inset Argument 1
7068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7087 \begin_layout Itemize
7091 \begin_layout Itemize
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7103 \begin_inset Index idx
7106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 -packages ! enumitem
7114 For more information see its documentation,
7115 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7124 \begin_layout Standard
7125 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7127 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7128 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7132 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7135 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_inset Argument 1
7139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7147 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7160 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 with negative indentation
7164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7165 Further Customization
7166 \begin_inset Index idx
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 Lists ! Customization
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7179 You can also change the style of description lists.
7183 \begin_layout Standard
7189 \begin_layout Standard
7190 changes the description label font, the command
7193 \begin_layout Standard
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 sets the list style.
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 An example where the command
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7212 itshape, style=nextline
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7219 \begin_layout Description
7221 \begin_inset space ~
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7234 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7236 itshape, style=nextline
7246 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7247 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7251 \begin_layout Description
7253 \begin_inset space ~
7256 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7257 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7258 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7261 \begin_layout Standard
7262 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7268 \begin_inset Index idx
7271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 -packages ! enumitem
7279 For more information see its documentation
7280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7289 \begin_layout Subsection
7291 \begin_inset Index idx
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7305 \begin_inset space ~
7308 Address: An Overview
7311 \begin_layout Standard
7312 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7313 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7321 \begin_inset space ~
7327 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7328 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7329 gags on the document.
7330 In contrast, you can use the
7337 \begin_inset space ~
7342 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7343 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 Of course, you're not limited to using
7355 \begin_inset space ~
7364 \begin_inset space ~
7369 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7370 some European academic papers.
7373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7377 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7389 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7390 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7394 \begin_inset space ~
7399 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7400 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7401 Here's an example of each:
7404 \begin_layout Right Address
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7410 \begin_inset Newline newline
7414 \begin_inset Newline newline
7417 When is it? What is today?
7420 \begin_layout Standard
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7430 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7432 the largest block of text on a single line.
7433 Here's an example of the
7440 \begin_layout Address
7442 \begin_inset Newline newline
7445 Where do I send this
7446 \begin_inset Newline newline
7449 Your post office and country
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 As you can see, both
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7465 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7470 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7471 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7477 This makes sense, since
7485 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7486 Thus, you have to use
7493 arg "newline-insert newline"
7498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7505 \begin_inset space ~
7510 ) to start a new line in an
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_layout Subsection
7529 \begin_layout Standard
7530 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7531 or list of references.
7533 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7550 \begin_layout Standard
7555 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7556 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7557 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7558 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7572 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7573 The book document classes ignores the
7577 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7581 in a letter document class.
7584 \begin_layout Standard
7589 environment does several things for you.
7590 First, it puts the centered label
7591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7599 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7601 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7602 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7603 the subsequent text.
7604 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7611 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7615 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7616 The new paragraph will still be in the
7621 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7622 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7625 \begin_layout Standard
7626 \begin_inset Float figure
7631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7633 \begin_inset Graphics
7634 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7647 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7668 \begin_layout Standard
7669 We would love to demonstrate the
7673 environment, but since this document is in the
7674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7681 class, we can't do this.
7682 We inserted it therefore as figure
7683 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7689 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7694 If you have never heard of an
7695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7702 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7726 \begin_layout Standard
7731 environment is used to list references.
7732 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7733 only use it at the end of the document.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7746 When you first open a
7750 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7751 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7767 depending on the document class.
7768 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7769 Each paragraph of the
7773 environment is a bibliography entry.
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 Each new paragraph is still in the
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7788 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7790 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7792 handling, have a look at section
7793 \begin_inset space ~
7797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7806 \begin_layout Subsection
7807 Special Environments
7810 \begin_layout Standard
7812 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7813 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7821 \begin_inset Index idx
7824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7834 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7847 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7849 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7854 key as a fixed whitespace.
7858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7871 \begin_inset space ~
7876 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7894 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7897 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7900 arg "newline-insert newline"
7917 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7918 So, when you finish using the
7923 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7924 Also, you can nest the
7929 environment inside of others.
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7936 \begin_layout Itemize
7940 arg "newline-insert newline"
7943 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7948 \begin_inset space \space{}
7958 arg "newline-insert newline"
7964 \begin_layout Itemize
7968 arg "newline-insert newline"
7978 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7984 \begin_layout Itemize
7985 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7986 You must put at least one
7990 in any line you want blank.
7991 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7995 \begin_layout Itemize
7996 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8000 since that will insert
8005 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8008 arg "self-insert \""
8014 \begin_layout Standard
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8030 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8034 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8035 printf("Hello World!
8040 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8044 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8048 \begin_layout Standard
8049 This is just the standard
8050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8061 \begin_layout Standard
8067 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8069 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8070 as if you used a typewriter.
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 Paragraph environments|)
8080 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8083 Program Code Listings
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8096 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8100 \begin_inset Index idx
8103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8112 \begin_layout Standard
8117 environment is similar to the
8122 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8123 computer console text.
8128 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8142 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8143 you can have empty lines.
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 have a certain language and a text style
8160 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8162 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8163 and \SpecialChar TeX
8167 \begin_layout Standard
8168 Because of these properties
8172 works like a typewriter.
8176 \begin_layout Verbatim
8181 \begin_layout Verbatim
8185 The following 2 lines are empty:
8188 \begin_layout Verbatim
8192 \begin_layout Verbatim
8196 \begin_layout Verbatim
8198 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8203 \begin_layout Standard
8208 environment is identical to
8212 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8213 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8220 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8225 \begin_layout Section
8226 Nesting Environments
8227 \begin_inset Index idx
8230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8231 Nesting ! Environments
8237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8246 \begin_layout Subsection
8250 \begin_layout Standard
8252 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8254 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8256 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8258 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8270 \begin_layout Enumerate
8274 \begin_layout Enumerate
8279 \begin_layout Enumerate
8283 \begin_layout Enumerate
8288 \begin_layout Enumerate
8292 \begin_layout Standard
8293 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8294 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8296 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8298 \begin_inset space ~
8302 \begin_inset space ~
8310 \begin_inset space ~
8314 \begin_inset space ~
8319 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8321 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8324 arg "depth-increment"
8330 arg "depth-decrement"
8344 arg "depth-increment"
8350 arg "depth-decrement"
8354 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8355 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8361 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8362 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8363 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8364 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8368 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8370 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8372 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8375 \begin_layout Subsection
8376 What You Can and Can't Nest
8379 \begin_layout Standard
8380 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8381 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8384 \begin_layout Standard
8385 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8386 than a simple yes or no.
8387 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8390 \begin_layout Itemize
8391 Completely unnestable
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8395 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8399 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8404 \begin_layout Standard
8405 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8406 environments have them:
8409 \begin_layout Description
8410 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8411 Can't nest into them.
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8433 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_layout Itemize
8446 \begin_layout Description
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8451 Nestable You can nest them.
8452 You can nest other things into them.
8456 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8480 \begin_layout Itemize
8486 \begin_layout Itemize
8492 \begin_layout Itemize
8498 \begin_layout Itemize
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8511 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Description
8519 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8520 You can't nest anything into them.
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8612 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Standard
8620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8628 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8638 \begin_inset space ~
8641 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8642 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8643 nested section headings violate this.
8651 \begin_layout Subsection
8652 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8653 \begin_inset Index idx
8656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8657 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8665 \begin_layout Standard
8666 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8667 affected by nesting anyhow.
8671 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Standard
8685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8693 Figures and tables in
8697 are not affected by this.
8702 Have a look at section
8703 \begin_inset space ~
8707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8709 reference "sec:Floats"
8713 for more information about
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8722 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8723 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8727 \begin_layout Standard
8728 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8736 of its own, it behaves just like a
8737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8744 paragraph environment.
8745 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8749 \begin_layout Standard
8750 Here's an example with a table:
8753 \begin_layout Enumerate
8758 \begin_layout Enumerate
8759 This is (a) and it's nested.
8763 \begin_layout Standard
8764 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8770 \begin_layout Standard
8772 \begin_inset Tabular
8773 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8774 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8775 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8776 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8868 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8874 \begin_layout Enumerate
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8879 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8882 \begin_layout Enumerate
8887 \begin_layout Enumerate
8888 This is (a) and it's nested.
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8893 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8901 \begin_inset Tabular
8902 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8903 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8989 \begin_layout Standard
8990 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8996 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9006 \begin_layout Enumerate
9010 \begin_layout Standard
9011 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9015 \begin_layout Standard
9016 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9019 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9022 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 This is (a) and it's nested.
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9032 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9040 \begin_inset Tabular
9041 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9042 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9129 \begin_layout Standard
9130 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9136 \begin_layout Enumerate
9138 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9156 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9157 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9161 \begin_layout Subsection
9162 Usage and General Features
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9167 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9176 is the innermost possible depth.
9177 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 level #1 – outermost
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 \begin_layout Enumerate
9200 \begin_layout Itemize
9205 \begin_layout Itemize
9214 \begin_layout Standard
9215 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9216 both of them in the example.
9217 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9227 For example, if we tried to nest another
9232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9239 , we would get errors.
9242 \begin_layout Subsection
9244 \begin_inset Index idx
9247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9256 \begin_layout Standard
9257 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9258 We have several examples of nested environments.
9259 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9264 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9267 \begin_layout Labeling
9268 \labelwidthstring MMM
9269 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9278 \begin_layout Labeling
9279 \labelwidthstring MMM
9280 #2-a This is level #2.
9281 We created it by using
9284 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9290 arg "depth-increment"
9297 \begin_layout Labeling
9298 \labelwidthstring MMM
9299 #3-a This is level #3.
9300 This time, we just enter
9307 arg "depth-increment"
9311 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9315 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9321 arg "depth-increment"
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9333 environment, nested inside of
9334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9342 So, it's at level #4.
9343 We did this by entering
9346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9352 arg "depth-increment"
9355 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9360 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9381 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9384 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9390 \begin_layout Labeling
9391 \labelwidthstring MMM
9392 #4-a This is level #4.
9396 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9399 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9404 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9408 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9413 keep nesting things inside
9414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9432 \begin_layout Labeling
9433 \labelwidthstring MMM
9434 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9435 and this is level #6.
9436 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #5-b Back to level #5.
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-decrement"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9470 arg "depth-decrement"
9473 , we're back at level #4.
9477 \begin_layout Labeling
9478 \labelwidthstring MMM
9479 #3-b Back to level #3.
9480 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9484 \begin_layout Labeling
9485 \labelwidthstring MMM
9486 #2-b Back to level #2.
9491 \begin_layout Labeling
9492 \labelwidthstring MMM
9493 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9494 After this sentence, we will enter
9498 and change the paragraph environment back to
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 We could have also used the
9522 environment in place of the
9527 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9531 Example 2: Inheritance
9534 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9535 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9538 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9547 arg "depth-increment"
9551 \begin_inset Newline newline
9554 which, we will change to the
9562 \begin_layout Enumerate
9567 environment, at level #2.
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9571 Notice how the nested
9575 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9579 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9583 \begin_layout Standard
9584 We ended this example by entering
9589 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9593 and reset the nesting depth by using
9596 arg "depth-decrement"
9602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9603 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9612 \begin_inset Argument 1
9615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9616 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9624 \begin_layout Enumerate
9625 This is level #1, in an
9629 paragraph environment.
9630 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9634 \begin_layout Enumerate
9639 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9645 arg "depth-increment"
9649 Now, what happens if we nest an
9653 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9654 label be? An asterisk?
9658 \begin_layout Itemize
9668 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9669 So, its label is a bullet.
9670 (We got here by using
9673 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9679 arg "depth-increment"
9682 , then changing the environment to
9690 \begin_layout Itemize
9691 Here's level #4, produced using
9694 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9700 arg "depth-increment"
9704 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9712 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9717 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9721 , because we are in the
9729 environment (that is, it is an
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9750 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9754 \begin_layout Enumerate
9755 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9758 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9761 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9764 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 arg "depth-decrement"
9771 to decrease the depth after the next
9774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9791 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9796 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9805 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9810 reset the counter for the label.
9814 \begin_layout Enumerate
9818 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9824 arg "depth-decrement"
9827 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9828 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9829 into the twofold-nested
9837 \begin_layout Enumerate
9838 The same thing happens if we do another
9841 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9847 arg "depth-decrement"
9850 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9854 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9859 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9874 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9881 The same rule applies for the
9885 environment, as well.
9888 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9889 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9892 \begin_layout Enumerate
9893 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9894 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9895 the same detail with how we did it.
9904 \begin_layout Standard
9912 arg "depth-increment"
9919 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9920 the example in parentheses someplace.
9921 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9922 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9923 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9937 Now we will add verse.
9938 \begin_inset Newline newline
9941 It will get much worse.
9942 \begin_inset Newline newline
9952 arg "depth-increment"
9963 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9964 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9968 \begin_inset Newline newline
9974 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 \begin_layout Standard
9988 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9994 \begin_layout Standard
9996 \begin_inset Tabular
9997 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9998 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10000 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10085 \begin_layout Verse
10089 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10099 arg "depth-increment"
10105 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10111 \begin_inset Newline newline
10119 arg "depth-decrement"
10126 \begin_layout Enumerate
10131 : level #1) This is another item.
10132 Note that selecting a
10136 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10137 3 times to put the table inside the
10145 \begin_layout Quotation
10146 We're now ending the
10150 list and changing to
10155 We're still at level #1.
10156 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10157 The next set of paragraphs is a
10158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10165 We will nest both the
10172 \begin_inset space ~
10177 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10181 for the letter body.
10185 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10188 to preserve the depth.
10189 Remember that you need to use
10192 arg "newline-insert newline"
10195 to create multiple lines inside the
10202 \begin_inset space ~
10212 \begin_layout Right Address
10214 \begin_inset Newline newline
10217 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10218 \begin_inset Newline newline
10224 \begin_layout Address
10226 \begin_inset space ~
10232 \begin_layout Quotation
10233 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10237 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10238 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10239 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10240 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10241 as soon as possible.
10242 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10245 \begin_layout Quotation
10246 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10247 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10248 with your order, along with payment.
10251 \begin_layout Quotation
10252 We thank you again for your patience.
10255 \begin_layout Address
10257 \begin_inset Newline newline
10264 \begin_layout Quotation
10265 That ends that example!
10268 \begin_layout Standard
10269 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10270 gives you a lot of power with just
10272 We could have easily nested an
10293 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10296 \begin_layout Subsection
10298 \begin_inset Index idx
10301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10302 Nesting ! Separation
10308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10310 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10317 \begin_layout Standard
10318 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10320 For example you need two different enumerations:
10323 \begin_layout Enumerate
10328 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 \begin_layout Standard
10338 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10344 \begin_layout Itemize
10350 \begin_layout Standard
10351 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10361 \begin_layout Enumerate
10365 \begin_layout Enumerate
10369 \begin_layout Standard
10370 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10371 list item and use the menu
10373 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10374 Start New Environment
10377 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10379 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10382 arg "paragraph-break"
10386 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10387 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10388 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10389 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10392 \begin_layout Standard
10393 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10396 arg "paragraph-break"
10399 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10402 \begin_layout Section
10403 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10404 \begin_inset Index idx
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10418 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10420 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10421 be broken at the end of a line.
10422 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10426 \begin_layout Subsection
10428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10430 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10435 \begin_inset Index idx
10438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10447 \begin_layout Standard
10448 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10449 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10450 ) not to break the line at
10452 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10455 \begin_layout Quote
10456 Further documentation is given in section
10457 \begin_inset Newline newline
10461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10463 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10472 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10487 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10496 A protected space is set with
10498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10499 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10501 \begin_inset space ~
10509 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10515 \begin_layout Subsection
10517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10519 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10524 \begin_inset Index idx
10527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10528 Spacing ! Horizontal
10536 \begin_layout Standard
10537 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 The length units are listed in Appendix
10545 \begin_inset space ~
10549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10551 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10558 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10562 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10567 \begin_inset Index idx
10570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10571 Spaces ! Inter-word
10579 \begin_layout Standard
10580 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10581 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10582 at the ends of sentences.
10583 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10584 automatically takes care about this.
10585 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10586 followed by a period; see section
10587 \begin_inset space ~
10591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10593 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10598 To insert a normal space, select
10600 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10601 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10603 \begin_inset space ~
10611 arg "space-insert normal"
10617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10619 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10621 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10626 \begin_inset Index idx
10629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10656 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10657 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10658 inside abbreviations:
10661 \begin_layout Quote
10663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10667 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10670 \begin_layout Standard
10671 or between values and units.
10672 Compare for example this:
10673 \begin_inset Newline newline
10677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10681 \begin_inset Newline newline
10684 10 kg (normal space
10687 \begin_layout Standard
10688 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10690 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10691 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10693 \begin_inset space ~
10701 arg "space-insert thin"
10707 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10711 \begin_layout Standard
10712 You can also insert the following space types:
10715 \begin_layout Description
10717 \begin_inset space ~
10721 \begin_inset space ~
10724 space A line with a
10725 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10729 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10733 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10736 negative thin space between the arrows.
10739 \begin_layout Description
10741 \begin_inset space ~
10745 \begin_inset space ~
10748 space A line with a
10749 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10753 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10757 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10760 negative medium space between the arrows.
10763 \begin_layout Description
10765 \begin_inset space ~
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10772 space A line with a
10773 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10777 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10781 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10784 negative thick space between the arrows.
10787 \begin_layout Description
10789 \begin_inset space ~
10793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10797 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10801 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10805 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10809 \begin_inset space ~
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10816 em) space between the arrows.
10819 \begin_layout Description
10821 \begin_inset space ~
10825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10829 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10833 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10837 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10848 em) space between the arrows.
10851 \begin_layout Description
10853 \begin_inset space ~
10857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10861 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10865 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10869 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10880 em) space between the arrows.
10883 \begin_layout Description
10885 \begin_inset space ~
10889 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10893 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10905 cm space between the arrows.
10908 \begin_layout Standard
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10916 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10920 lists the different space sizes.
10923 \begin_layout Standard
10924 \begin_inset Float table
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10930 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10935 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10939 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10949 \begin_inset Tabular
10950 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10951 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11228 \begin_inset Index idx
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11240 \begin_layout Standard
11241 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11242 feature for adding extra space
11243 in a uniform fashion.
11244 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11245 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11246 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11247 equally between themselves.
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11251 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11254 \begin_layout Quote
11256 This is on the left side
11257 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11260 This is on the right
11263 \begin_layout Quote
11266 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11276 \begin_layout Quote
11279 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11283 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11287 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11293 \begin_layout Standard
11294 That was an example in the
11300 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11304 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11308 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11311 is one in a standard paragraph.
11312 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11316 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11323 \begin_inset space ~
11328 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11333 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11337 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_layout Standard
11345 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11355 \begin_layout Standard
11357 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11367 \begin_layout Standard
11369 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11373 \begin_inset space ~
11379 \begin_layout Standard
11381 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11385 \begin_inset space ~
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11393 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11403 \begin_layout Standard
11404 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11412 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11416 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11418 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11419 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11423 option in the space dialog.
11431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11435 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11440 \begin_inset Index idx
11443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11452 \begin_layout Standard
11453 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11454 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11457 \begin_layout Standard
11458 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11461 What is correct English?:
11462 \begin_inset Newline newline
11466 \begin_inset Newline newline
11470 \begin_inset space ~
11473 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11474 \begin_inset Newline newline
11478 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11489 \begin_inset Newline newline
11493 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11504 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11510 \begin_layout Standard
11512 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11529 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11532 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11536 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11546 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11553 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11562 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11563 That is why it is named
11564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11572 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11573 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11577 \begin_layout Subsection
11579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11581 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11586 \begin_inset Index idx
11589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11599 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11602 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11604 \begin_inset space ~
11610 There you find the following sizes:
11613 \begin_layout Standard
11626 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11627 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11632 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11643 \begin_inset Index idx
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11647 Document ! Settings
11652 for the paragraph separation.
11653 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11664 \begin_layout Standard
11670 \begin_inset Index idx
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11679 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11680 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11685 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11686 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11695 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11704 s are described in section
11705 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11711 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11720 If there are several
11724 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11725 You can therefore use
11729 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11732 \begin_layout Standard
11737 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11738 \begin_inset space ~
11742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11744 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11751 \begin_layout Standard
11752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11763 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11775 \begin_layout Subsection
11776 Paragraph Alignment
11777 \begin_inset Index idx
11780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11781 Paragraph ! Alignment
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11790 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11795 dialog (toolbar button
11798 arg "layout-paragraph"
11802 There are five possibilities:
11805 \begin_layout Itemize
11813 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11819 \begin_layout Itemize
11827 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11833 \begin_layout Itemize
11841 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11847 \begin_layout Itemize
11855 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11861 \begin_layout Itemize
11869 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11876 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11877 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11878 the left and right margins.
11879 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11884 This paragraph is right aligned,
11887 \begin_layout Standard
11889 this one is centered,
11892 \begin_layout Standard
11894 this one is left aligned.
11897 \begin_layout Subsection
11899 \begin_inset Index idx
11902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11903 Page breaks ! Forced
11909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11911 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11918 \begin_layout Standard
11919 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11920 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11921 force a page break where you want one.
11922 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11923 is good at page breaking.
11924 Only if you use a lot of
11928 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11929 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11932 \begin_layout Standard
11933 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11934 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11938 have to change the page breaking.
11941 \begin_layout Standard
11942 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11944 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11947 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11949 \begin_inset space ~
11955 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11958 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 \begin_inset space ~
11965 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11967 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11968 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11971 \begin_layout Standard
11972 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11973 at the top of a page.
11974 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11976 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11977 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11978 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11982 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11986 to learn more about
11993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11997 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12002 \begin_inset Index idx
12005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12006 Page breaks ! Clear
12014 \begin_layout Standard
12015 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12016 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12017 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12018 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12019 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12026 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12028 \begin_inset space ~
12034 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12037 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12039 \begin_inset space ~
12043 \begin_inset space ~
12048 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12049 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12052 \begin_layout Subsection
12054 \begin_inset Index idx
12057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12066 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12074 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12076 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12079 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12081 \begin_inset space ~
12085 \begin_inset space ~
12093 arg "newline-insert newline"
12097 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12100 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12102 \begin_inset space ~
12106 \begin_inset space ~
12114 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12117 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12119 This is useful to avoid
12120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12127 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12130 \begin_layout Standard
12131 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12132 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12134 very good at line breaking.
12135 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12136 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12137 \begin_inset space ~
12141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12143 reference "sec:Quote"
12148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12150 reference "sec:Verse"
12155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12157 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12164 \begin_layout Subsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12187 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12210 you can insert horizontal lines.
12211 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12212 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12213 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12216 \begin_layout Standard
12218 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12229 \begin_layout Section
12230 Characters and Symbols
12233 \begin_layout Standard
12234 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12235 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12236 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12244 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12248 for information on how this is done.
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12257 dialog via the menu
12259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12260 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 \begin_layout Standard
12267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12276 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12278 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12286 \begin_layout Section
12287 Fonts and Text Styles
12288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12290 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12297 \begin_layout Subsection
12299 \begin_inset Index idx
12302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12311 \begin_layout Standard
12312 There are two types of fonts:
12315 \begin_layout Description
12317 \begin_inset space ~
12321 \begin_inset Index idx
12324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12330 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12335 characters) in the font.
12336 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12337 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12338 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12339 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12340 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12341 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12342 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12343 \begin_inset Newline newline
12346 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12347 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12348 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12349 sizes than at small ones.
12350 \begin_inset Newline newline
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12372 \begin_layout Description
12374 \begin_inset space ~
12378 \begin_inset Index idx
12381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12387 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12388 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12389 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12390 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12391 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12392 image manipulation program.
12393 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12394 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12398 pixels high up to 34
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12402 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12403 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12404 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12406 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12407 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12408 \begin_inset Newline newline
12411 Bitmap fonts are named
12414 \begin_inset space ~
12419 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12424 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12425 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12426 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12427 use scalable fonts.
12430 \begin_layout Standard
12431 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12434 \begin_layout Standard
12435 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12436 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12437 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12438 font to emphasize text, you use an
12439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12447 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12449 In \SpecialChar LyX
12450 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12454 \begin_layout Subsection
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12459 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12467 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 used its own fonts.
12469 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12470 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12473 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12474 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12475 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12476 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12477 to a word processor.
12478 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12479 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12480 files are very portable across
12481 different machines.
12482 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12483 has increased a lot
12484 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12487 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12489 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12495 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12500 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12501 code in the document
12502 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12505 \begin_layout Standard
12506 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12507 engines that are also able directly
12508 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12510 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12512 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12514 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12515 that is installed on your system.
12516 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12519 \begin_layout Standard
12520 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12528 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12529 es; so you might have to experiment.
12537 \begin_layout Standard
12538 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12548 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12549 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12550 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12559 \begin_layout Subsection
12560 Document Font and Font size
12561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12563 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12568 \begin_inset Index idx
12571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12578 \begin_inset Index idx
12581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12590 \begin_layout Standard
12591 You can set the document fonts in the
12593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12597 \begin_inset Index idx
12600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12601 Document ! Settings
12611 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12612 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12615 \begin_inset space ~
12624 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12626 \begin_inset space ~
12629 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12637 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12638 This requires that you use
12650 as the output format, i.
12651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12655 \begin_inset space \space{}
12658 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12659 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12660 installed (see section
12661 \begin_inset space ~
12665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12667 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12672 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12674 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12675 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12677 \begin_inset space ~
12680 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12681 cannot determine the family.
12682 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12683 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12686 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12691 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12696 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12702 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12703 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12711 \begin_inset space ~
12717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12730 European Computer Modern
12733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12740 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12743 \begin_layout Standard
12752 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12753 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12758 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12761 \begin_inset space ~
12766 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12772 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12773 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12776 \begin_layout Itemize
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12785 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12798 \begin_inset space ~
12803 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12804 community in order to replace
12808 as the default font.
12809 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12810 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12813 \begin_inset space ~
12826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 One difference is improved kerning.
12835 \begin_layout Itemize
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12848 fonts in (the rare) case that
12851 \begin_inset space ~
12856 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12871 Virtual means that it
12872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12883 -glyphs from other fonts.
12884 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12906 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12912 \begin_inset Index idx
12915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12917 -packages ! aeguill
12922 with the document preamble line
12923 \begin_inset Newline newline
12930 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12931 \begin_inset Newline newline
12936 will fix the guillemet problem.
12941 and that accented characters are not
12945 glyph, but built of
12949 characters, the accent and the letter.
12950 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12956 If you search for example for the French word
12957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12964 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12973 and not for the glyph
12974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12988 \begin_layout Itemize
12989 If you do not like the look of
12997 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13018 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13022 serif and typewriter fonts,
13026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13034 \begin_inset space ~
13043 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13048 \begin_inset space \space{}
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13060 \begin_inset space \space{}
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13074 \begin_inset space ~
13084 but you can also select your own.
13085 \begin_inset Newline newline
13088 The differences between roman,
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13100 fonts are explained in section
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13107 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13112 \begin_inset Newline newline
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13123 was originally designed for newspapers.
13124 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13125 into the small newspaper columns.
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13134 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13138 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13151 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13156 depends on the class you are using.
13157 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13160 \begin_layout Standard
13161 Note that the font size is the
13166 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13167 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13168 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13169 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13178 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13185 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13201 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13206 serif or typewriter.
13211 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13221 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13224 \begin_layout Standard
13229 LaTeX font encoding
13231 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13232 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13238 \begin_inset Index idx
13241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13243 -packages ! fontenc
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13255 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13260 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13261 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13269 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13271 Use Old Style Figures
13275 Use True Small Caps
13278 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13281 Use Old Style Figures
13283 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13285 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13293 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13297 Use True Small Caps
13299 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13300 of scaled capitals.
13301 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13302 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13310 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13311 a font to display the script characters.
13315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13316 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13322 \begin_inset Index idx
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13332 So this has no effect for the document language
13346 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13358 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13363 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13364 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13366 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13368 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13371 dialog, see section
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13378 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13390 \begin_layout Subsection
13394 \begin_layout Standard
13395 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13396 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13398 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13399 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13400 choose a math font in the dialog
13402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13406 \begin_inset Index idx
13409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13410 Document ! Settings
13416 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13417 automatically selects a math font.
13418 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13419 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13428 \begin_inset space ~
13434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13439 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13440 document font is available.
13443 \begin_layout Standard
13444 Note that the math font will not be used for
13448 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13454 or by the insertion of the command
13461 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13466 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13467 while the math characters do not.
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13472 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13475 \begin_inset space ~
13483 \begin_inset space ~
13488 in the document font settings.
13491 \begin_layout Standard
13492 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13493 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13494 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13495 font (in most cases
13496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13511 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13512 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13520 \begin_inset space ~
13526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13532 \begin_layout Subsection
13533 Using Different Character Styles
13534 \begin_inset Index idx
13537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13544 \begin_inset Index idx
13547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13556 \begin_layout Standard
13557 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13558 automatically changes the character style for certain
13559 paragraph environments.
13561 supports two character styles,
13570 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13579 style, do one of the following:
13582 \begin_layout Itemize
13583 click on the toolbar button
13592 \begin_layout Itemize
13593 use the key binding
13602 \begin_layout Standard
13603 These commands are all toggles.
13608 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13611 \begin_layout Standard
13612 One typically uses the
13616 style for proper names.
13618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13625 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13634 A more widely used character style is the
13639 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13646 \begin_layout Itemize
13647 clicking on the toolbar button
13656 \begin_layout Itemize
13657 using the keybindings
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13671 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13673 use a different font.
13676 \begin_layout Standard
13677 We've been using the
13681 style all over the place in this document.
13682 Here's one more example:
13685 \begin_layout Quotation
13688 Do not overuse character styles!
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13692 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13693 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13694 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13695 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13700 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13708 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13710 \begin_inset space ~
13713 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13719 arg "dialog-show character"
13725 \begin_layout Subsection
13726 Fine-Tuning with the
13731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13733 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13738 \begin_inset Index idx
13741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13750 \begin_layout Standard
13751 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13753 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13754 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13755 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13756 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13757 from ordinary dialog.
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13762 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13763 \begin_inset Newline newline
13766 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13767 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13770 \begin_layout Standard
13771 To use custom character styles, open the
13773 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13775 \begin_inset space ~
13778 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13781 dialog or press the toolbar button
13784 arg "dialog-show character"
13788 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13789 font property that you can choose.
13790 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13793 \begin_inset space ~
13798 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13803 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13804 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13805 environments all at once.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13812 \begin_inset space ~
13824 \begin_layout Labeling
13825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13839 The possible options are:
13843 \begin_layout Labeling
13844 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13849 This is the Roman font family.
13850 Normally a serif font.
13851 It's also the default family.
13861 \begin_layout Labeling
13862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13866 \begin_inset space ~
13873 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13885 \begin_layout Labeling
13886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13893 This is the Typewriter font family.
13899 arg "font-typewriter"
13908 \begin_layout Labeling
13909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13914 This corresponds to the print weight.
13919 \begin_layout Labeling
13920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13925 This is the Medium font series.
13926 It's also the default series.
13929 \begin_layout Labeling
13930 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13937 This is the Bold font series.
13950 \begin_layout Labeling
13951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13956 As the name implies.
13961 \begin_layout Labeling
13962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13967 This is the Upright font shape.
13968 It's also the default shape.
13971 \begin_layout Labeling
13972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13986 s the Italic font shape
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 This is the Slanted font shape
14002 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14003 , this is different from italic).
14006 \begin_layout Labeling
14007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14011 \begin_inset space ~
14018 This is the Small caps font shape
14025 \begin_layout Labeling
14026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14031 Alters the text color.
14032 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14036 \begin_inset space ~
14041 , which means that the document default color set in
14043 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14044 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14050 \begin_inset space ~
14055 is used, you can choose between
14132 \begin_inset Index idx
14135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14144 \begin_layout Labeling
14145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14150 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14151 the language of the document.
14152 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14153 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14155 \begin_inset Newline newline
14158 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14160 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14161 When using the spell checking (see section
14162 \begin_inset space ~
14166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14168 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14172 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14175 \begin_layout Labeling
14176 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14181 Alters the size of the font.
14182 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14183 proportional to the document font size.
14184 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14185 the details, but a general description of what
14191 \begin_layout Labeling
14192 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14213 arg "font-size tiny"
14219 \begin_layout Labeling
14220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14241 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14247 \begin_layout Labeling
14248 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14269 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14275 \begin_layout Labeling
14276 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14297 arg "font-size small"
14303 \begin_layout Labeling
14304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14318 It's also the default size.
14322 arg "font-size normal"
14328 \begin_layout Labeling
14329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14350 arg "font-size large"
14356 \begin_layout Labeling
14357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14378 arg "font-size larger"
14384 \begin_layout Labeling
14385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14406 arg "font-size largest"
14412 \begin_layout Labeling
14413 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14434 arg "font-size huge"
14440 \begin_layout Labeling
14441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14462 arg "font-size giant"
14468 \begin_layout Labeling
14469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14474 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14494 arg "font-size increase"
14500 \begin_layout Labeling
14501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14506 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14526 arg "font-size decrease"
14533 \begin_layout Standard
14538 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14539 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14541 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14542 — use those instead.
14543 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14546 \begin_layout Labeling
14547 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14552 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14557 \begin_layout Labeling
14558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14565 This is text with emphasize on
14568 This might seem like the same as
14572 , but it is actually a bit different.
14578 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14580 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14583 \begin_layout Labeling
14584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14591 This is text with Underbar on.
14597 arg "font-underline"
14603 \begin_inset Newline newline
14608 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14609 when you could not change fonts.
14610 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14611 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14612 because some people
14616 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14624 \begin_inset space ~
14631 This is text with Double underbar on.
14637 arg "font-underunderline"
14641 \begin_inset Newline newline
14644 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14645 about double underbar.
14648 \begin_layout Labeling
14649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14653 \begin_inset space ~
14660 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14666 arg "font-underwave"
14670 \begin_inset Newline newline
14673 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14674 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14677 \begin_layout Labeling
14678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14685 This is text with Strikeout on.
14691 arg "font-strikeout"
14695 \begin_inset Newline newline
14698 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14699 changed in the meantime.
14702 \begin_layout Labeling
14703 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14710 This is text with Noun on.
14717 , this is a logical attribute.
14718 Normally it's equivalent to
14721 \begin_inset space ~
14730 \begin_layout Standard
14731 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14732 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14734 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14736 \begin_inset space ~
14739 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14745 arg "dialog-show character"
14748 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14749 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14752 arg "textstyle-apply"
14756 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14760 \begin_layout Standard
14761 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14768 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14769 (suppose you just set the shape to
14770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14788 \begin_inset space ~
14800 \begin_layout Standard
14801 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14809 \begin_inset space ~
14821 \begin_layout Itemize
14827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14834 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14852 \begin_inset Newline newline
14856 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14870 \begin_inset Note Note
14873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14874 For more on phantoms see section
14875 \begin_inset space ~
14879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14881 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14891 \begin_inset Newline newline
14897 \begin_layout Itemize
14902 fonts use characters with serifs.
14903 These are the small
14904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14912 The following example shows the difference:
14913 \begin_inset Newline newline
14917 \begin_inset Newline newline
14922 text without serifs
14925 \begin_inset Newline newline
14928 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14929 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14936 \begin_layout Itemize
14941 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14942 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14943 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14946 \begin_layout Standard
14947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14954 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14955 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14958 \begin_inset space ~
14963 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14964 the property to be removed.
14965 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14966 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14967 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14985 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14986 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14994 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14998 \begin_inset space ~
15003 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15014 If you, for example, set
15015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15033 \begin_inset space ~
15038 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15047 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15050 \begin_layout Standard
15051 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15052 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15055 \begin_layout Section
15056 Printing and Previewing
15059 \begin_layout Subsection
15063 \begin_layout Standard
15064 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15065 using \SpecialChar LyX
15066 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15067 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15068 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15069 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15071 Additional Features
15076 \begin_layout Standard
15078 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15081 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15082 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15083 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15086 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15087 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15088 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15089 to turn your writing into printable output.
15090 This happens in two stages:
15093 \begin_layout Enumerate
15094 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15095 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15097 a file with the extension,
15098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15112 \begin_layout Enumerate
15113 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15114 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15115 to use the commands in the
15119 file to produce printable output.
15122 \begin_layout Subsection
15123 Output file formats
15124 \begin_inset Index idx
15127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15136 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15144 Simple text (ASCII)
15145 \begin_inset Index idx
15148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15149 File formats ! ASCII
15157 \begin_layout Standard
15158 This file type has the extension
15159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15171 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15175 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15185 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15186 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15188 \begin_inset space ~
15194 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15195 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15196 bibliography (section
15197 \begin_inset space ~
15201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15203 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15208 If your document includes such material, use
15210 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15211 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15213 \begin_inset space ~
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15221 \begin_inset space ~
15229 \begin_inset space ~
15233 \begin_inset space ~
15239 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15240 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15246 \begin_inset Index idx
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15250 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15259 \begin_layout Standard
15260 This file type has the extension
15261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15272 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15275 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15276 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15277 -Errors or to process it manually
15278 with console commands.
15279 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15280 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15281 's temporary directory whenever you
15282 view or export your document.
15285 \begin_layout Standard
15286 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15287 -file using the menu
15289 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15290 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15294 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15295 export variants are explained in section
15296 \begin_inset space ~
15300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15302 reference "subsec:Export"
15309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15311 \begin_inset Index idx
15314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15323 \begin_layout Standard
15324 This file type has the extension
15325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15345 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15346 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15347 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15351 \begin_layout Standard
15352 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15353 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15354 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15355 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15356 when you view the DVI.
15357 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15360 \begin_layout Standard
15361 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15363 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15364 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15369 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15370 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15372 \begin_inset space ~
15378 The latter option uses the program
15380 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15386 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15389 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15390 font access (see section
15391 \begin_inset space ~
15395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15397 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15402 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15403 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15410 \begin_inset Index idx
15413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15414 File formats ! PostScript
15422 \begin_layout Standard
15423 This file type has the extension
15424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15436 PostScript was developed by the company
15440 as a printer language.
15441 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15443 PostScript can be seen as a
15444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15447 programming language
15448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15451 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15456 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15463 \begin_inset Index idx
15466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15468 -packages ! pstricks
15478 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15481 \begin_layout Standard
15482 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15486 Encapsulated PostScript
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15490 (EPS, file extension
15491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15503 As \SpecialChar LyX
15504 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15505 convert them in the background to EPS.
15506 If, for example, you have 50
15507 \begin_inset space ~
15510 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15512 \begin_inset space ~
15515 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15516 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15518 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15519 EPS to avoid this problem.
15522 \begin_layout Standard
15523 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15525 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15526 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15534 \begin_inset Index idx
15537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 \begin_inset Index idx
15547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15556 \begin_layout Standard
15557 This file type has the extension
15558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15574 Portable Document Format
15575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15582 was derived from PostScript.
15583 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15592 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15593 looks exactly the same.
15596 \begin_layout Standard
15597 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15601 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15605 (JPG, file extension
15606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 Portable Network Graphics
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15637 (PNG, file extension
15638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15650 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15651 converts them in the
15652 background to one of these formats.
15653 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15654 will slow down your workflow.
15655 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15658 \begin_layout Standard
15659 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15661 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15667 \begin_layout Description
15669 \begin_inset space ~
15672 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15676 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15679 \begin_layout Description
15681 \begin_inset space ~
15688 ) This uses the program
15690 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15693 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15696 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15699 is a new engine, derived from
15703 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15704 access (see section
15705 \begin_inset space ~
15709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15711 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15716 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15717 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15722 \begin_layout Description
15724 \begin_inset space ~
15731 ) This uses the program
15736 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15742 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15743 font access (see section
15744 \begin_inset space ~
15748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15750 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15755 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15756 vertically written Japanese.
15759 \begin_layout Description
15761 \begin_inset space ~
15764 (cropped) This is the same as
15767 \begin_inset space ~
15772 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15773 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15774 to generate good-looking
15775 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15778 \begin_layout Description
15780 \begin_inset space ~
15783 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15787 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15791 \begin_layout Description
15793 \begin_inset space ~
15796 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15800 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15801 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15805 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15806 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15809 \begin_layout Standard
15813 \begin_inset space ~
15822 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15823 works without problems.
15824 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15825 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15829 \begin_inset space ~
15837 \begin_inset space ~
15842 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15850 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15852 \begin_inset Index idx
15855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15856 FileFormats ! XHTML
15862 \begin_inset Index idx
15865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15874 \begin_layout Standard
15875 This file type has the extension
15876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15888 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15889 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15890 When \SpecialChar LyX
15891 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15892 suitable for the purpose.
15893 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15896 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15899 between different formats, which are described in section
15901 Math Output in XHTML
15906 \begin_inset space ~
15914 \begin_layout Standard
15915 XHTML output remains
15916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15923 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15924 features are supported yet.
15928 and the World Wide Web
15932 Additional Features
15934 manual, for more information.
15937 \begin_layout Standard
15938 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15940 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15941 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15947 \begin_layout Subsection
15949 \begin_inset Index idx
15952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15961 \begin_layout Standard
15962 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15963 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15972 or use the toolbar button
15979 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15980 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15987 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15991 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15999 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16004 Further output formats can be selected via
16006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16007 View (Other Formats)
16009 or the toolbar button
16010 \begin_inset Graphics
16011 filename ../images/view-others.png
16013 groupId toolbarbuttons
16020 \begin_layout Standard
16021 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16022 viewer window using the menu
16024 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16029 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16030 Update (Other Formats)
16035 \begin_layout Standard
16036 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16039 To have a real output, export your document.
16042 \begin_layout Section
16043 A few Words about Typography
16044 \begin_inset Index idx
16047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16056 \begin_layout Subsection
16057 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16058 \begin_inset Index idx
16061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16068 \begin_inset Index idx
16071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 In \SpecialChar LyX
16083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 character comes in four lengths: the
16106 , and the minus sign:
16107 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16113 \begin_layout Standard
16114 \begin_inset Tabular
16115 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16116 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16117 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16118 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16119 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16120 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16149 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16189 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16216 \begin_inset space ~
16219 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16226 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16253 \begin_inset space ~
16256 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16311 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16317 \begin_layout Standard
16318 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16330 character multiple times in a row.
16331 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16332 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 \begin_layout Standard
16366 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16367 math mode and has a length of its own.
16368 Here are some examples:
16371 \begin_layout Enumerate
16372 line- and page-breaks
16373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16383 \begin_layout Enumerate
16385 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16395 \begin_layout Enumerate
16396 Oh — there's a dash.
16397 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16407 \begin_layout Enumerate
16408 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16412 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16422 \begin_layout Subsection
16424 \begin_inset Index idx
16427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16436 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16443 \begin_layout Standard
16444 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16445 but automatically in the output.
16446 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16452 \begin_inset Index idx
16455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16462 following the rules of the document language.
16465 \begin_layout Standard
16467 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16471 font and with unusual constructs, like
16472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16480 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16481 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16482 This is done with the menu
16484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16485 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16487 \begin_inset space ~
16493 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16495 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16499 \begin_layout Standard
16500 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16501 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16512 would then see the hyphen
16513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16520 as a hyphenation possibility.
16521 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16522 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16523 as described in section
16524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16527 Prevent Hyphenation
16528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16534 \begin_inset space ~
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16544 \begin_inset Index idx
16547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16557 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16560 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16567 \begin_layout Standard
16568 When \SpecialChar LyX
16569 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16570 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 appropriate amount of space.
16579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16582 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16584 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16585 gets after another word.
16588 \begin_layout Standard
16589 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16590 not work in all cases.
16592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16603 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16604 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16607 \begin_layout Standard
16608 Here are some examples of
16612 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16615 \begin_layout Itemize
16620 \begin_layout Itemize
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16629 \begin_layout Itemize
16631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16635 this is too much space!
16638 \begin_layout Itemize
16643 \begin_layout Standard
16644 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16647 \begin_layout Standard
16648 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16651 \begin_layout Enumerate
16655 \begin_inset space ~
16660 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16661 \begin_inset space ~
16665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16667 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16672 \begin_inset Index idx
16675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16676 Spaces ! inter-word
16684 \begin_layout Enumerate
16688 \begin_inset space ~
16693 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16700 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16705 \begin_inset Index idx
16708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16717 \begin_layout Enumerate
16721 \begin_inset space ~
16725 \begin_inset space ~
16729 \begin_inset space ~
16736 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16738 \begin_inset space ~
16743 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16744 This function is also bound to
16747 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16753 \begin_layout Standard
16754 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16757 \begin_layout Itemize
16759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16763 \begin_inset space \space{}
16766 this is too much space!
16769 \begin_layout Itemize
16770 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16774 \begin_layout Standard
16775 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16776 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16778 will take care of this.
16781 \begin_layout Standard
16782 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16786 \begin_inset space ~
16792 feature described in the section
16794 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16799 Additional Features
16804 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16806 \begin_inset Index idx
16809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16810 Typography ! Quotes
16816 \begin_inset Index idx
16819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16850 \begin_layout Standard
16852 usually sets quotes correctly.
16853 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16854 and use a closing quote at the end.
16856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16864 The keyboard character,
16868 , generates this automatically.
16871 \begin_layout Standard
16872 You can specify what character the
16876 key produces using the submenu
16882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16886 \begin_inset Index idx
16889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16890 Document ! Settings
16900 There are six choices:
16903 \begin_layout Labeling
16904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 \begin_layout Labeling
16928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16931 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16935 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16941 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16945 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16951 \begin_layout Labeling
16952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16955 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16959 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16965 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16969 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16975 \begin_layout Labeling
16976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16979 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16983 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16989 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16993 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16999 \begin_layout Labeling
17000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17003 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17007 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17013 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17017 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17023 \begin_layout Labeling
17024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17027 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17031 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17037 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17041 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17047 \begin_layout Standard
17048 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17051 arg "quote-insert single"
17057 \begin_layout Subsection
17059 \begin_inset Index idx
17062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17063 Typography ! Ligatures
17069 \begin_inset Index idx
17072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17103 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17110 \begin_layout Standard
17111 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17112 print them as single characters.
17113 These groups are known as
17118 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17119 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17121 Here are the standard ligatures:
17124 \begin_layout Itemize
17128 \begin_layout Itemize
17132 \begin_layout Itemize
17136 \begin_layout Itemize
17140 \begin_layout Itemize
17144 \begin_layout Standard
17145 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17148 \begin_layout Standard
17149 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17150 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17158 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17174 To break a ligature, use
17176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17177 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17179 \begin_inset space ~
17186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17197 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17214 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17222 \begin_layout Subsection
17224 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17226 \begin_inset Index idx
17229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17239 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17246 \begin_layout Standard
17249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17253 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17256 \begin_layout Description
17258 The name of the game.
17261 \begin_layout Description
17263 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17267 \begin_layout Description
17269 The \SpecialChar TeX
17270 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17274 \begin_layout Description
17275 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17276 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17280 \begin_layout Standard
17281 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17287 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17296 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17297 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17298 converges to the number
17299 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17302 : The actual version is
17303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17311 , the previous one was
17312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17323 \begin_layout Subsection
17325 \begin_inset Index idx
17328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17337 \begin_layout Standard
17338 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17339 space between two words.
17340 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17350 for units use the menu
17352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17353 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17355 \begin_inset space ~
17363 arg "space-insert thin"
17369 \begin_layout Standard
17370 Here is an example to show the differences:
17373 \begin_layout Standard
17374 \begin_inset Tabular
17375 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17376 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17377 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17378 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 \begin_inset space ~
17389 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17401 space between number and unit
17408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17417 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17429 half space between number and unit
17442 \begin_layout Subsection
17444 \begin_inset Index idx
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17448 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17456 \begin_layout Standard
17457 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17459 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17460 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17461 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17462 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17463 These bits of text became known as
17474 \begin_layout Standard
17475 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17476 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17477 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17478 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17479 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17480 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17481 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17482 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17483 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17484 \begin_inset Newline newline
17492 \begin_inset Newline newline
17500 \begin_inset Newline newline
17503 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17504 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17505 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17507 \begin_inset space ~
17511 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17513 key "latexcompanion"
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17528 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17529 's page break mechanism.
17532 \begin_layout Chapter
17533 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17536 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17543 \begin_layout Standard
17544 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17547 \begin_inset space ~
17553 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17556 \begin_layout Section
17558 \begin_inset Index idx
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17577 \begin_layout Standard
17579 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17582 \begin_layout Description
17585 \begin_inset space ~
17588 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17589 \begin_inset Newline newline
17593 \begin_inset Note Note
17596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17597 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17605 \begin_layout Description
17606 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17607 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17608 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17611 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17612 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17614 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset Newline newline
17624 \begin_inset Note Comment
17627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17628 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17637 \begin_layout Description
17639 \begin_inset space ~
17642 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17643 set in the document settings under
17645 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17647 \begin_inset space ~
17653 \begin_inset Newline newline
17657 \begin_inset Newline newline
17661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17670 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17671 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17676 of a comment that appears in the output.
17682 \begin_inset Newline newline
17686 \begin_inset Newline newline
17689 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17692 \begin_layout Standard
17693 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17705 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17708 \begin_layout Section
17710 \begin_inset Index idx
17713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17722 name "sec:Footnotes"
17729 \begin_layout Standard
17731 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17734 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17737 or the toolbar button
17740 arg "footnote-insert"
17752 \begin_inset Graphics
17753 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17762 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17763 's representation of your footnote.
17773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17792 label, the box will
17796 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17797 Clicking on the box label again will close
17810 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17811 and click on the footnote
17826 \begin_layout Standard
17827 Here is an example footnote:
17835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17836 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17844 \begin_layout Standard
17845 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17846 position where the footnote box is placed.
17847 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17848 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17849 according to the document class.
17851 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17852 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17858 ey are described in the
17861 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_layout Section
17871 \begin_inset Index idx
17874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17883 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17890 \begin_layout Standard
17891 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17893 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17895 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17897 \begin_inset space ~
17902 or the toolbar button
17905 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17931 appearing within your text.
17932 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17933 's representation of your margin
17942 \begin_layout Standard
17943 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17947 \begin_inset Marginal
17950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17952 This is a marginal note.
17960 \begin_layout Standard
17961 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17962 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17963 pages, right on odd pages.
17966 \begin_layout Standard
17967 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17970 \begin_inset space ~
17978 \begin_inset space ~
17986 \begin_layout Section
17987 Graphics and Images
17988 \begin_inset Index idx
17991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17998 \begin_inset Index idx
18001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18008 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18010 name "sec:Graphics"
18017 \begin_layout Standard
18018 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18019 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18022 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18031 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18034 \begin_layout Standard
18035 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18040 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18041 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18043 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18044 \begin_inset space ~
18048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18050 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18057 \begin_layout Standard
18062 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18063 of the image in the output.
18064 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18072 \begin_inset space ~
18081 \begin_inset space ~
18085 \begin_inset space ~
18089 \begin_inset space ~
18094 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18095 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18103 \begin_layout Standard
18107 \begin_inset space ~
18111 \begin_inset space ~
18116 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18117 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18119 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18124 \begin_inset space ~
18129 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18130 with the image size is printed.
18133 \begin_layout Standard
18134 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18135 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18137 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18140 \begin_layout Standard
18142 \begin_inset Graphics
18143 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18151 \begin_layout Standard
18152 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18153 the image into a float, see section
18154 \begin_inset space ~
18158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18160 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18167 \begin_layout Subsection
18169 \begin_inset Index idx
18172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18181 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18188 \begin_layout Standard
18189 You can insert images in any known file format.
18190 But as we explained in section
18191 \begin_inset space ~
18195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18197 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18201 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18203 therefore uses the program
18207 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18208 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18209 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18210 \begin_inset space ~
18214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18216 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18223 \begin_layout Standard
18224 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18227 \begin_layout Description
18229 \begin_inset space ~
18232 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18233 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18234 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18238 Graphics Interchange Format
18239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18242 (GIF, file extension
18243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18255 \begin_inset Index idx
18258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18290 Portable Network Graphics
18291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18294 (PNG, file extension
18295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18307 \begin_inset Index idx
18310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18342 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18346 (JPG, file extension
18347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18371 \begin_inset Index idx
18374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18405 \begin_layout Description
18407 \begin_inset space ~
18410 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18412 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18413 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18414 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18415 \begin_inset Newline newline
18418 Scalable image formats can be
18419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18422 Scalable Vector Graphics
18423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18426 (SVG, file extension
18427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18439 \begin_inset Index idx
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18474 Encapsulated PostScript
18475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18478 (EPS, file extension
18479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18491 \begin_inset Index idx
18494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18526 Portable Document Format
18527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18530 (PDF, file extension
18531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18543 \begin_inset Index idx
18546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18561 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18562 result will not be scalable.
18563 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18569 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18577 \begin_layout Standard
18578 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18585 \begin_layout Subsection
18586 Grouping of Image Settings
18587 \begin_inset Index idx
18590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18591 Images ! Settings grouping
18599 \begin_layout Standard
18600 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18602 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18603 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18605 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18606 need to manually change each of them.
18610 \begin_layout Standard
18611 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18614 \begin_inset space ~
18618 \begin_inset space ~
18630 \begin_inset space ~
18634 \begin_inset space ~
18640 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18641 and checking the name of the desired group.
18644 \begin_layout Section
18646 \begin_inset Index idx
18649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18665 \begin_layout Standard
18666 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18669 arg "tabular-insert"
18674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18678 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18679 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18680 from the rest of the table.
18681 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18682 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18684 Here is an example table:
18687 \begin_layout Standard
18689 \begin_inset Tabular
18690 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18691 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18692 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18693 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18694 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18695 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 \begin_layout Subsection
18899 \begin_layout Standard
18900 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18903 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18907 This brings up the table dialog.
18908 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18909 cursor is placed currently.
18910 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18911 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18912 done on all of your selection.
18915 \begin_layout Standard
18916 In addition to the table dialog, the
18919 \begin_inset space ~
18924 helps you in setting table properties.
18925 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18928 \begin_layout Standard
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18937 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18938 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18939 current cell respectively.
18940 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18942 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18943 of text, see section
18944 \begin_inset space ~
18948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18950 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18957 \begin_layout Standard
18958 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18959 using the check box
18968 This will merge the cells to
18972 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18973 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18974 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18975 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18976 in the last row without the upper border:
18979 \begin_layout Standard
18981 \begin_inset Tabular
18982 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18983 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18985 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18986 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18998 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19007 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19083 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 \begin_layout Standard
19119 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19120 -arguments for the table.
19121 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19122 explained in the chapter
19129 \begin_inset space ~
19135 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19136 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19137 but are visible in the output.
19140 \begin_layout Standard
19141 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 Most DVI-viewers are
19153 able to display rotations.
19161 \begin_layout Standard
19166 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19171 adds lines for all cell borders.
19174 \begin_layout Subsection
19176 \begin_inset Index idx
19179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19180 Tables ! Longtables
19186 \begin_inset Index idx
19189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19198 \begin_layout Standard
19199 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19202 \begin_inset space ~
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19215 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19216 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19219 \begin_layout Description
19224 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19225 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19226 except for the first page, if
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_layout Description
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19246 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19247 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19250 \begin_layout Description
19255 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19256 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19257 except for the last page, if
19260 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_layout Description
19272 \begin_inset space ~
19277 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19278 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19281 \begin_layout Description
19282 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19283 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19289 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19292 \begin_inset space ~
19300 \begin_layout Standard
19301 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19302 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19303 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19309 In this context, first means first in this order:
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19324 \begin_inset space ~
19329 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19332 \begin_layout Standard
19334 \begin_inset Tabular
19335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19336 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19337 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19338 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19339 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19340 <row endfirsthead="true">
19341 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19347 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19352 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19361 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19371 <row endfirsthead="true">
19372 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19404 <row endhead="true">
19405 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19425 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19435 <row endhead="true">
19436 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19447 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 <row endfoot="true">
19469 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19480 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19520 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20470 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20479 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20490 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20552 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 <row endlastfoot="true">
21451 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 \begin_layout Subsection
21490 \begin_inset Index idx
21493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21502 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21509 \begin_layout Standard
21510 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21511 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21512 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21513 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21517 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21520 \begin_layout Standard
21521 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21522 for the column in the table dialog.
21523 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21524 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21528 \begin_layout Standard
21530 \begin_inset Tabular
21531 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21532 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21533 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21534 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21535 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21624 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 This is longer now.
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21737 This is longer now.
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21768 \begin_layout Standard
21769 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21770 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21776 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21782 Selection with the mouse or with
21786 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21787 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21788 the selection from outside the table.
21791 \begin_layout Section
21793 \begin_inset Index idx
21796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21812 \begin_layout Subsection
21816 \begin_layout Standard
21817 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21818 have a fixed location.
21820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21827 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21835 \begin_inset space ~
21840 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21841 too many notes on the current page.
21844 \begin_layout Standard
21845 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21846 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21847 and pages without text.
21848 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21849 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21850 Floats are therefore numbered.
21851 Referencing is described in section
21852 \begin_inset space ~
21856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21858 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21865 \begin_layout Standard
21866 To insert a float, use the menu
21868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21872 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21873 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21875 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21876 \begin_inset Index idx
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21886 paragraph within the float.
21887 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21888 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21889 left-clicking on the box label.
21890 A closed float box looks like this:
21891 \begin_inset Graphics
21892 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21897 – a gray button with a red label.
21900 \begin_layout Standard
21901 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21903 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21906 \begin_layout Subsection
21908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21910 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21915 \begin_inset Index idx
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 Floats ! Figure floats
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21929 \begin_inset space ~
21933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21935 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21939 was created using the menu
21941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21942 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21948 arg "float-insert figure"
21952 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21961 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21965 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21966 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21968 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21970 \begin_inset space ~
21978 arg "layout-paragraph"
21984 \begin_layout Standard
21985 \begin_inset Float figure
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 \begin_inset Graphics
21993 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22008 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22012 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22025 \begin_layout Standard
22026 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22027 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22038 ) and refer to it using the menu
22040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22046 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22050 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22051 vague references like
22052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22059 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22060 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22070 For more about cross-references, see section
22071 \begin_inset space ~
22075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22077 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22084 \begin_layout Standard
22085 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22086 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22087 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22088 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22089 as described in section
22090 \begin_inset space ~
22094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22096 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22102 \begin_inset space ~
22106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22108 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22112 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22113 You can also set the images one below the other.
22115 \begin_inset space ~
22119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22121 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22128 reference "fig:Platypus"
22132 are the subfigures.
22135 \begin_layout Standard
22136 \begin_inset Float figure
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22146 \begin_inset Float figure
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22157 name "fig:Undefinable"
22169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 \begin_inset Graphics
22171 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22182 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22186 \begin_inset Float figure
22191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22192 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22197 name "fig:Platypus"
22209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22210 \begin_inset Graphics
22211 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22223 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22235 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22239 Two distorted images.
22252 \begin_layout Subsection
22254 \begin_inset Index idx
22257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 Floats ! Table floats
22266 \begin_layout Standard
22267 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22270 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22273 or the toolbar button
22276 arg "float-insert table"
22280 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22281 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22282 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22284 \begin_inset space ~
22288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22290 reference "tab:Table-float"
22297 \begin_layout Standard
22298 \begin_inset Float table
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22309 name "tab:Table-float"
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 \begin_inset Tabular
22324 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22325 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22326 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22327 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22328 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22455 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22479 \end{array}\right]$
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22521 \begin_layout Subsection
22523 \begin_inset Index idx
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 \begin_layout Standard
22537 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22538 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22539 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22541 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22549 \begin_inset space ~
22557 \begin_layout Section
22559 \begin_inset Index idx
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 \begin_layout Standard
22573 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22575 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22576 \begin_inset space \space{}
22583 \begin_layout Standard
22584 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22585 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22591 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22592 and its alignment within the page.
22595 \begin_layout Standard
22597 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22607 height_special "totalheight"
22612 backgroundcolor "none"
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 This is a minipage.
22619 The text is set in an italic style.
22622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22625 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22626 another formatting.
22634 \begin_layout Standard
22635 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22638 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22642 as described in section
22643 \begin_inset space ~
22647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22649 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22654 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22660 \begin_layout Standard
22661 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22671 height_special "totalheight"
22676 backgroundcolor "none"
22679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22680 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22681 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22687 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22691 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22701 height_special "totalheight"
22706 backgroundcolor "none"
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22711 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22719 \begin_layout Standard
22720 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22726 \begin_layout Standard
22727 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22729 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22736 \begin_inset space ~
22744 \begin_layout Chapter
22745 Mathematical Formulas
22746 \begin_inset Index idx
22749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 \begin_inset Index idx
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22790 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22797 \begin_layout Standard
22798 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22803 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22806 \begin_layout Section
22808 \begin_inset Index idx
22811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 \begin_layout Standard
22821 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22834 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22836 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22837 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22838 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22846 \begin_layout Standard
22847 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22851 \begin_inset space ~
22856 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22859 \begin_layout Standard
22860 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22861 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22864 \begin_layout Standard
22865 This is a line with an inline formula
22866 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22872 \begin_layout Standard
22873 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22874 paragraph, like this one:
22875 \begin_inset Formula
22882 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22885 \begin_layout Standard
22887 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22889 For example, typing
22890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22903 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22904 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22908 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22911 \begin_inset space ~
22919 \begin_layout Subsection
22920 Navigating in Formulas
22921 \begin_inset Index idx
22924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_layout Standard
22934 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22935 achieved with the arrow keys.
22937 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22938 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22943 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22944 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22948 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22952 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22955 \end{array}\right]$
22963 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22968 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22969 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22977 , printed in this document as
22978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22982 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22989 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22990 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22991 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22996 For example, if you want
22997 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23005 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23015 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23019 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23024 , since in the latter case only the
23027 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23032 will be under the square root sign:
23033 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23039 \begin_layout Standard
23040 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23042 \begin_inset Formula
23044 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23053 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23054 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23057 \begin_layout Subsection
23061 \begin_layout Standard
23062 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23063 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23067 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23068 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23069 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23070 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23071 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23075 \begin_layout Subsection
23076 Exponents and Subscripts
23077 \begin_inset Index idx
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 \begin_inset Index idx
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_layout Standard
23100 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23103 arg "math-superscript"
23109 arg "math-subscript"
23112 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23114 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23117 , type in a formula
23120 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23130 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23136 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23140 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23146 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23152 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23161 , you have to use an extra
23165 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23166 For example, if you want
23167 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23173 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23179 Subscripts are similar: To get
23180 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23186 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23194 \begin_layout Subsection
23196 \begin_inset Index idx
23199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_layout Standard
23209 Create a fraction either with the command
23215 or by using the icon
23218 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23224 \begin_inset space ~
23230 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23231 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23232 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23237 To move back up, press
23242 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23243 \begin_inset Formula
23245 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23248 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23256 \begin_layout Subsection
23258 \begin_inset Index idx
23261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23270 \begin_layout Standard
23271 Roots can be created using the
23274 \begin_inset space ~
23282 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23288 arg "math-insert \\root"
23310 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23316 always produces a square root.
23319 \begin_layout Subsection
23320 Operators with Limits
23321 \begin_inset Index idx
23324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23331 \begin_inset Index idx
23334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23343 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23350 \begin_layout Standard
23352 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23356 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23359 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23360 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23361 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23362 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23363 The sum operator will automatically place its
23364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23371 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23373 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23377 \begin_inset Formula
23379 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23384 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23388 \begin_layout Standard
23389 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23391 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23392 behind the operator and using the menu
23394 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23395 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23397 \begin_inset space ~
23401 \begin_inset space ~
23415 \begin_layout Standard
23416 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23425 \begin_inset Index idx
23428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 \begin_inset Formula
23437 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23442 which will place the
23443 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23455 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23456 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23462 \begin_layout Standard
23463 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23470 Have a look at section
23471 \begin_inset space ~
23475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23477 reference "subsec:Functions"
23481 for an explanation of function macros.
23484 \begin_layout Subsection
23486 \begin_inset Index idx
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 \begin_layout Standard
23499 Most math symbols can be found in the
23502 \begin_inset space ~
23507 under one of several categories; including
23524 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23528 \begin_layout Standard
23529 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23530 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23531 don't have to use the
23534 \begin_inset space ~
23539 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23541 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23544 \begin_layout Subsection
23546 \begin_inset Index idx
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23558 \begin_layout Standard
23559 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23565 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23571 \begin_inset space ~
23579 arg "math-insert \\space"
23583 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23584 For example, the sequence
23589 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23592 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23594 \begin_inset Graphics
23595 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23600 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23601 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23602 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23603 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23604 , because they are negative
23606 Here are two examples:
23609 \begin_layout Standard
23619 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23625 \begin_layout Standard
23635 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23641 \begin_layout Subsection
23643 \begin_inset Index idx
23646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23655 name "subsec:Functions"
23662 \begin_layout Standard
23666 \begin_inset space ~
23671 contains under the button
23674 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23677 a number of function macros, such as
23678 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23682 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23690 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23697 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23698 avoid confusions, because
23699 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23703 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23709 \begin_layout Standard
23710 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23712 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23716 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23722 \begin_layout Standard
23723 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23724 are placed, as described in section
23725 \begin_inset space ~
23729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23731 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23738 \begin_layout Subsection
23740 \begin_inset Index idx
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 \begin_layout Standard
23753 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23755 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23756 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23757 commands, for example, to enter
23758 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23761 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23762 Our example is entered by typing
23767 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23774 \begin_inset space ~
23778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23780 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23784 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23787 \begin_layout Standard
23788 \begin_inset Float table
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23799 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23803 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset Tabular
23814 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23815 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24400 \begin_layout Standard
24401 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24404 \begin_inset space ~
24412 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24415 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24419 \begin_layout Section
24420 Brackets and Delimiters
24421 \begin_inset Index idx
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 \begin_inset Index idx
24434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24443 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24450 \begin_layout Standard
24451 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24453 For some purposes, using just the keys
24458 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24459 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24460 toolbar delimiter icon
24463 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24467 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24468 \begin_inset Formula
24470 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24478 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24479 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24483 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24486 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24492 \begin_inset Formula
24494 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24502 \begin_layout Standard
24503 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24504 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24508 \begin_layout Standard
24509 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24510 left side and right side.
24511 If you use the option
24514 \begin_inset space ~
24519 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24520 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24522 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24527 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24528 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24531 \begin_layout Standard
24532 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24533 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24534 is to go inside the brackets.
24535 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24540 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24541 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24542 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24546 arg "math-delim ( )"
24552 \begin_layout Section
24553 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24554 \begin_inset Index idx
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 \begin_inset Index idx
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 \begin_inset Index idx
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24578 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24586 \begin_layout Standard
24587 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24591 \begin_inset space ~
24599 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24603 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24604 Here is an example:
24605 \begin_inset Formula
24607 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24616 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24617 \begin_inset space ~
24621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24623 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24628 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24629 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24630 This alignment is set in the box
24635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24684 for every column as default.
24685 For example, the sequence
24686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24697 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24698 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24699 corresponds to the relevant column.
24700 The result will look like this:
24701 \begin_inset Formula
24704 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24705 column & has & has\,right\\
24706 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24715 \begin_layout Standard
24716 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24719 arg "newline-insert newline"
24722 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24723 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24725 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24728 or the math toolbar.
24731 \begin_layout Standard
24732 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24733 It can be created with the menu
24735 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24736 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24750 Here is an example:
24751 \begin_inset Formula
24765 \begin_layout Standard
24766 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24769 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24772 arg "newline-insert newline"
24776 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24781 arg "newline-insert newline"
24784 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24792 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24793 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24794 A new row is created by every further entry of
24797 arg "newline-insert newline"
24801 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24802 Here is an example:
24803 \begin_inset Formula
24805 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24806 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24811 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24812 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24813 \begin_inset Formula
24815 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24823 \begin_layout Standard
24824 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24831 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24832 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24835 reference "eq:asquared"
24840 The other types are described in section
24841 \begin_inset space ~
24845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24847 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24854 \begin_layout Section
24855 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24856 \begin_inset Index idx
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 Math ! Formula numbering
24866 \begin_inset Index idx
24869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 Math ! Referencing formulas
24876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24878 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24885 \begin_layout Standard
24886 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24888 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24889 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24891 \begin_inset space ~
24895 \begin_inset space ~
24903 arg "math-number-toggle"
24907 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24908 within parentheses.
24909 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24910 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24911 the document class.
24912 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24913 separated by a dot:
24914 \begin_inset Formula
24924 arg "math-number-toggle"
24927 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24928 You can only number displayed formulas.
24931 \begin_layout Standard
24932 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24934 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24935 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24937 \begin_inset space ~
24941 \begin_inset space ~
24949 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24952 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24953 \begin_inset Formula
24956 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24962 To number all lines use the shortcut
24965 arg "math-number-toggle"
24971 \begin_layout Standard
24972 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24975 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24976 A label is inserted with the menu
24978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24987 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24988 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24989 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25001 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25002 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25003 We inserted in the following example the label
25004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25011 in the second line:
25012 \begin_inset Formula
25014 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25015 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25020 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25021 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25022 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25026 \begin_inset space ~
25034 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25038 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25039 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25040 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25041 as the formula number:
25044 \begin_layout Standard
25045 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25048 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25055 \begin_layout Standard
25056 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25057 's cross-reference box are described in section
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25064 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25069 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25077 \begin_layout Section
25078 User defined math macros
25079 \begin_inset Index idx
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 \begin_layout Standard
25093 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25094 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25095 Math macros are explained in section
25098 \begin_inset space ~
25110 \begin_layout Section
25114 \begin_layout Subsection
25116 \begin_inset Index idx
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25128 \begin_layout Standard
25129 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25130 To set a font in a formula, use the
25133 \begin_inset space ~
25141 arg "math-insert \\font"
25144 , or enter its command, listed in table
25145 \begin_inset space ~
25149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25151 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25158 \begin_layout Standard
25159 \begin_inset Float table
25164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25165 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25170 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25174 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 \begin_inset Tabular
25185 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25186 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25188 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25247 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25422 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 \begin_layout Standard
25457 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25465 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25481 \begin_layout Standard
25482 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25483 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25488 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25489 space when you need a space in the box.
25490 Here is an example where
25491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25502 denotes the set of numbers:
25503 \begin_inset Formula
25505 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25513 \begin_layout Standard
25514 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25515 You can, for example, put a character in
25524 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25528 \begin_inset Newline newline
25531 So it is better not to use this feature.
25534 \begin_layout Standard
25535 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25536 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25540 \begin_inset Newline newline
25543 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25549 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25550 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25556 \begin_layout Standard
25563 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25566 \begin_layout Standard
25567 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25569 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25570 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25572 \begin_inset space ~
25580 \begin_layout Subsection
25582 \begin_inset Index idx
25585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 \begin_layout Standard
25595 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25597 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25601 \begin_inset space ~
25605 \begin_inset space ~
25613 \begin_inset space ~
25621 arg "math-insert \\font"
25625 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25626 in black instead of blue.
25627 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25628 Here is an example:
25629 \begin_inset Formula
25632 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25633 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25642 \begin_layout Subsection
25644 \begin_inset Index idx
25647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25656 \begin_layout Standard
25657 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25658 automatically chosen in most situations.
25676 For most characters,
25684 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25685 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25690 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25691 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25692 thinks are appropriate.
25693 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25696 arg "math-insert \\style"
25700 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25701 For example, you can set
25702 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25705 , which is normally in
25714 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25718 The four styles are used in the following example:
25721 \begin_layout Standard
25722 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25726 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25730 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25734 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25740 \begin_layout Standard
25741 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25742 is set in a particular size with the menu
25744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25746 \begin_inset space ~
25751 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25752 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25753 will be adjusted to correspond.
25754 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25765 \begin_layout Standard
25769 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25775 \begin_layout Section
25776 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25778 \begin_inset Index idx
25781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25788 \begin_inset Index idx
25791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25800 \begin_layout Standard
25802 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25803 that are in common use.
25806 \begin_layout Subsection
25807 Enabling AMS-Support
25810 \begin_layout Standard
25811 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25812 the document by selecting the checkbox
25815 \begin_inset space ~
25819 \begin_inset space ~
25823 \begin_inset space ~
25830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25834 \begin_inset Index idx
25837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 Document ! Settings
25846 \begin_inset space ~
25852 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25853 -errors in formulas,
25854 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25857 \begin_layout Subsection
25859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25861 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25866 \begin_inset Index idx
25869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25870 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25879 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25880 provides a selection of different formula types.
25882 allows you to choose between
25903 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25910 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25913 \begin_layout Chapter
25917 \begin_layout Section
25919 \begin_inset Index idx
25922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25931 name "sec:Cross-References"
25938 \begin_layout Standard
25939 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25940 's strengths is cross-references.
25941 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25943 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25944 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25945 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25948 \begin_layout Enumerate
25952 \begin_layout Enumerate
25953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25955 name "enu:Second-item"
25962 \begin_layout Enumerate
25966 \begin_layout Standard
25967 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25969 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25972 or by pressing the toolbar button
25979 A gray label box like this:
25980 \begin_inset Graphics
25981 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25986 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25988 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26023 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26024 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26040 \begin_layout Standard
26041 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26046 or the toolbar button
26049 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26053 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26054 \begin_inset Graphics
26055 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26060 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26062 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26075 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26079 \begin_layout Standard
26080 As an alternative to
26082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26085 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26090 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26091 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26105 \begin_layout Standard
26106 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26113 reference "enu:Second-item"
26120 \begin_layout Standard
26121 It is recommended to use a protected space
26125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26126 described in section
26127 \begin_inset space ~
26131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26133 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26142 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26143 line breaks between them.
26146 \begin_layout Standard
26147 There are six formats of cross-references:
26150 \begin_layout Description
26151 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26154 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26161 \begin_layout Description
26162 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26163 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26175 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26182 \begin_layout Description
26183 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26184 \begin_inset space ~
26188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26189 LatexCommand pageref
26190 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26197 \begin_layout Description
26199 \begin_inset space ~
26203 \begin_inset space ~
26206 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26208 LatexCommand vpageref
26209 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26214 \begin_inset Newline newline
26217 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26218 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26219 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26220 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26221 it prints “on the next page”.
26222 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26225 \begin_layout Description
26227 \begin_inset space ~
26231 \begin_inset space ~
26235 \begin_inset space ~
26238 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26241 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26246 \begin_inset Newline newline
26249 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26255 ; otherwise it behaves like
26259 \begin_inset space ~
26263 \begin_inset space ~
26272 \begin_layout Description
26274 \begin_inset space ~
26277 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26278 \begin_inset Newline newline
26282 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26290 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26300 \begin_inset Index idx
26303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 -packages ! prettyref
26311 \begin_inset Index idx
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26316 -packages ! refstyle
26327 \begin_inset Newline newline
26330 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26331 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26334 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26339 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26347 is the default and preferred because
26351 supports only English documents.
26352 The format is specified by using the command
26364 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26365 preamble of the document.
26366 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26379 ) can be done with this command
26380 \begin_inset Newline newline
26387 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26392 \begin_inset Newline newline
26395 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26397 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26399 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26406 \begin_layout Description
26408 \begin_inset space ~
26411 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26413 LatexCommand nameref
26414 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26421 \begin_layout Standard
26422 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26423 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26425 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26429 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 You can only use the style
26438 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26442 is always possible.
26445 \begin_layout Standard
26446 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26447 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26449 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26450 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26456 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26463 \begin_layout Standard
26464 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26468 \begin_inset space ~
26472 \begin_inset space ~
26477 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26478 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26481 \begin_inset space ~
26486 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26487 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26490 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26496 \begin_layout Standard
26497 You can change labels at any time.
26498 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26499 do not need to think about this.
26502 \begin_layout Standard
26503 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26505 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26509 \begin_layout Standard
26510 References are described in detail in the section
26511 \begin_inset space ~
26515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26525 \begin_inset space ~
26533 \begin_layout Section
26534 Table of Contents and other Listings
26535 \begin_inset Index idx
26538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 \begin_inset Index idx
26548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26564 \begin_layout Subsection
26566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26568 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26575 \begin_layout Standard
26576 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26579 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26581 \begin_inset space ~
26585 \begin_inset space ~
26591 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26593 If you click on it, the
26597 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26598 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26599 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26601 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26603 \begin_inset space ~
26608 that is described in section
26609 \begin_inset space ~
26613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26615 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26622 \begin_layout Standard
26623 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26624 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26626 \begin_inset space ~
26630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26632 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26636 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26638 \begin_inset space ~
26642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26644 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26648 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26650 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26653 \begin_layout Subsection
26654 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26657 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26665 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26667 You can insert them via the
26669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26673 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26676 \begin_layout Section
26677 URLs and Hyperlinks
26678 \begin_inset Index idx
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 \begin_inset Index idx
26691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 \begin_layout Subsection
26702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26720 \begin_layout Standard
26721 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26723 \begin_inset Flex URL
26726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26743 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26747 \begin_layout Standard
26748 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26765 \begin_layout Subsection
26767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26769 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26776 \begin_layout Standard
26777 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26782 or with the toolbar button
26789 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26798 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26799 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26802 name "LyX's homepage"
26803 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26807 , an Email address like this:
26808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26810 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26811 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26816 , or a link to a file.
26819 \begin_layout Standard
26820 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26833 to the link target.
26836 \begin_layout Standard
26837 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26838 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26839 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26840 the text style dialog.
26841 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26847 name "LyX's homepage"
26848 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26855 \begin_layout Standard
26856 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26860 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26862 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26863 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26867 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26869 \begin_inset Newline newline
26877 \begin_inset Newline newline
26884 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26887 \begin_layout Section
26889 \begin_inset Index idx
26892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26901 name "sec:Appendices"
26908 \begin_layout Standard
26909 Appendices are created with the menu
26911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26913 \begin_inset space ~
26917 \begin_inset space ~
26923 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26924 as the appendix part of the book.
26925 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26929 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26930 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26931 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26932 and the subsection number.
26933 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26937 \begin_layout Standard
26939 \begin_inset space ~
26943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26945 reference "chap:Credits"
26950 \begin_inset space ~
26954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26956 reference "subsec:Export"
26963 \begin_layout Section
26965 \begin_inset Index idx
26968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26977 name "sec:Bibliography"
26984 \begin_layout Standard
26985 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26987 You can include a bibliography database,
26991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26992 Known under the name
26993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26996 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27006 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27007 manually, using the paragraph environment
27011 , which was described in section
27012 \begin_inset space ~
27016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27018 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27023 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27024 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27028 use a bibliography database.
27031 \begin_layout Subsection
27032 The Bibliography Environment
27035 \begin_layout Standard
27040 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27042 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27051 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27053 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27063 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27072 or the toolbar button
27075 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27079 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27080 containing the available citations.
27081 Select one or more keys from the list and
27091 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27092 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27096 \begin_layout Standard
27097 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27098 entry with surrounding brackets.
27103 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27104 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27120 Companion Second Edition
27123 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27125 key "latexcompanion"
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 The \SpecialChar LyX
27134 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27135 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27144 \begin_layout Standard
27145 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27150 \begin_inset space ~
27158 arg "layout-paragraph"
27162 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27165 \begin_layout Subsection
27166 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27168 \begin_inset Index idx
27171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27172 Bibliography ! Databases
27178 \begin_inset Index idx
27181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27191 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27198 \begin_layout Standard
27199 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27205 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27207 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27208 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27213 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27215 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27216 your working field in a database.
27217 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27218 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27219 list for that document.
27220 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27224 \begin_layout Standard
27225 The database is a text file with the file extension
27226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27237 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27238 The format is explained in
27239 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27245 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27247 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27249 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27254 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27255 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27256 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27258 \begin_inset Flex URL
27261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27263 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 To use a database, use the menu
27274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27279 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27281 \begin_inset space ~
27287 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27288 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27295 Add bibliography to TOC
27297 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27302 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27303 in the document or just the cited references.
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27319 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27320 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27321 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27322 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27324 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27330 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27331 \begin_inset Newline newline
27335 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27337 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27349 \begin_layout Standard
27350 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27355 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27357 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27365 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27370 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27371 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27372 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27376 The following variants are possible:
27379 \begin_layout Description
27380 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27381 with other bibliography packages (e.
27382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27386 \begin_inset space \space{}
27393 ), only with the package
27397 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27401 \begin_layout Description
27402 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27403 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27404 with all bibliography packages, except
27409 \begin_layout Description
27410 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27415 , works with all bibliography packages
27418 \begin_layout Standard
27419 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27420 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27422 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27425 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27438 \begin_layout Standard
27439 When you select the option
27441 Sectioned bibliography
27445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27446 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27449 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27450 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27452 Customizing Bibliographies
27456 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27461 Additional Features
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27467 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27468 the two methods of creating them.
27469 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27470 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27471 We used the style file
27475 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27478 \begin_layout Subsection
27480 \begin_inset Index idx
27483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27484 Bibliography ! Citation format
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27493 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27494 For this feature you need to enable the option
27500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27504 \begin_inset Index idx
27507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27508 Document ! Settings
27518 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27519 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27520 style files as explained in
27521 the previous section.
27524 \begin_layout Standard
27525 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27526 the citation reference window.
27527 Here is an example where the text
27528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27532 \begin_inset space ~
27536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27539 appears after the reference:
27542 \begin_layout Standard
27544 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27547 key "latexcompanion"
27554 \begin_layout Section
27556 \begin_inset Index idx
27559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27575 \begin_layout Standard
27576 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27580 \begin_inset space ~
27585 or the toolbar button
27592 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27593 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27594 by \SpecialChar LyX
27595 as the index entry.
27598 \begin_layout Standard
27599 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27602 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27604 \begin_inset space ~
27610 A light blue box labeled
27611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27622 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27623 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27627 \begin_layout Standard
27628 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27629 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27630 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27631 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27633 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27635 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27642 \begin_layout Subsection
27643 Grouping Index Entries
27644 \begin_inset Index idx
27647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27656 \begin_layout Standard
27657 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27659 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27660 lists under the entry
27661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27669 First we create the entry
27670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27678 \begin_inset space ~
27682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27684 reference "subsec:Lists"
27689 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27690 \begin_inset space ~
27694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27696 reference "sec:Itemize"
27700 , we insert the command
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27719 \begin_layout Standard
27720 for the enumerated list in section
27721 \begin_inset space ~
27725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27727 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27734 \begin_layout Standard
27735 The exclamation mark
27736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27743 marks the grouping levels.
27744 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27745 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27746 If we don't have an index entry for
27747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27754 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27757 \begin_layout Subsection
27759 \begin_inset Index idx
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27763 Index ! Page ranges
27771 \begin_layout Standard
27772 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27774 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27775 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27776 an index entry in section
27777 \begin_inset space ~
27781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27783 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27790 \begin_layout Standard
27793 Paragraph environments|(
27796 \begin_layout Standard
27797 and another entry at the end of section
27798 \begin_inset space ~
27802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27804 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27814 Paragraph environments|)
27817 \begin_layout Standard
27819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27842 respectively start and end the index range.
27843 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27844 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27845 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27846 An example is the index entry
27847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27850 Document ! Settings
27851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27857 \begin_layout Subsection
27859 \begin_inset Index idx
27862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27863 Index ! Cross referencing
27871 \begin_layout Standard
27872 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27873 We referred for example in the index entry
27874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27882 \begin_inset space ~
27886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27888 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27892 ) to the index entry
27893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27900 in the same section using the entry
27903 \begin_layout Standard
27906 GIF|see{Image formats}
27909 \begin_layout Standard
27910 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27912 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27913 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27916 \begin_layout Subsection
27918 \begin_inset Index idx
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 Index ! Entry order
27930 \begin_layout Standard
27931 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27932 follow the rules for the index order.
27933 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27939 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27941 \begin_inset space ~
27945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27947 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27956 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27957 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27982 \begin_inset Index idx
27985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 Dummy entries ! maïs
27992 \begin_inset Index idx
27995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27996 Dummy entries ! maître
28002 \begin_inset Index idx
28005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28006 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28011 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28012 maïs, maison, maître.
28013 To achieve this, we use the command
28016 \begin_layout Standard
28019 previous entry@current entry
28022 \begin_layout Standard
28023 In our case we want to have
28024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28039 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28042 \begin_layout Standard
28048 \begin_layout Standard
28049 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28050 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28052 See the next subsection for an example.
28055 \begin_layout Standard
28056 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28062 \begin_layout Standard
28063 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28068 to generate the index (see sec.
28069 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28075 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28084 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28085 -package aeguill in sec.
28086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28092 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28096 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28097 -packages although all these index
28098 commands start with
28099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28112 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28117 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28132 \begin_layout Standard
28144 \begin_layout Subsection
28146 \begin_inset Index idx
28149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28150 Index ! Entry layout
28158 \begin_layout Standard
28159 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28160 \begin_inset Index idx
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28166 This is an italic dummy entry
28171 You can also format the page number using the character
28172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28179 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28180 -command without a backslash.
28181 We can write for example
28184 \begin_layout Standard
28187 italic page number:|textit
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 to get the page number in italic.
28192 \begin_inset Index idx
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28196 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28201 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28202 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28220 \begin_inset space ~
28226 Have a look at section
28227 \begin_inset space ~
28231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28233 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28237 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28241 \begin_layout Standard
28242 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28250 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28254 to generate the index, see sec.
28255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28261 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28270 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28275 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28279 key "latexcompanion"
28291 \begin_layout Standard
28292 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28294 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28295 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28296 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28297 If so, put the following in the preamble
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28316 \begin_layout Standard
28322 \begin_layout Standard
28323 in the index entry.
28324 \begin_inset Index idx
28327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28328 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28333 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28334 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28335 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28338 \begin_layout Standard
28339 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28340 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28341 a bold font for all index entries.
28342 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28354 documentation for details,
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28357 key "makeindex,xindy"
28364 \begin_layout Subsection
28366 \begin_inset Index idx
28369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28378 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28385 \begin_layout Standard
28386 If the index generation program
28390 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28391 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28395 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28396 distribution, is used.
28400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28405 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28406 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28407 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28408 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28409 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28419 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28421 dialog, see section
28422 \begin_inset space ~
28426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28428 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28433 The available options are listed and explained in
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28436 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28441 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28445 \begin_layout Standard
28446 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28447 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28450 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28451 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28455 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28456 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28459 \begin_layout Subsection
28463 \begin_layout Standard
28464 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28465 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28473 next to the standard index.
28475 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28476 that add this feature.
28483 \begin_inset Index idx
28486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 -packages ! splitidx
28493 package to generate multiple indexes.
28494 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28500 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28509 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28510 style, but it also includes
28511 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28512 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28520 \begin_layout Standard
28521 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28522 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28524 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28525 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28528 and select the option
28530 Use multiple Indexes
28537 already contains the standard index
28538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28546 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28547 also appear as a heading) to the
28551 input field and press the
28556 The new index now also appears in the list.
28557 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28558 label color to the new index.
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28572 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28573 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28574 are additional features:
28577 \begin_layout Itemize
28578 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28579 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28582 \begin_layout Itemize
28583 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28584 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28592 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28593 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28594 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28595 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28598 \begin_layout Section
28599 Nomenclature/Glossary
28600 \begin_inset Index idx
28603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28610 \begin_inset Index idx
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28644 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28651 \begin_layout Standard
28652 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28653 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28654 called nomenclature or glossary.
28657 \begin_layout Standard
28658 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28665 \begin_inset Index idx
28668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28670 -packages ! nomencl
28676 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28678 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28684 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28688 \begin_layout Standard
28689 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28690 and then use the menu
28692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28698 \begin_inset space ~
28703 or the toolbar button
28706 arg "nomencl-insert"
28711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28722 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28725 \begin_layout Standard
28726 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28727 The first is the term or
28731 that you wish to define.
28736 of the term or symbol.
28739 \begin_layout Standard
28740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28748 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28749 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28757 \begin_layout Subsection
28758 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28759 \begin_inset Index idx
28762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28763 Nomenclature ! Layout
28771 \begin_layout Standard
28772 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28776 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28783 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28791 \begin_inset Newline newline
28799 \begin_inset Newline newline
28805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28812 character starts/ends the formula.
28813 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28814 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28826 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28836 \begin_layout Standard
28837 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28838 -syntax is given in section
28839 \begin_inset space ~
28843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28845 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28852 \begin_layout Standard
28856 \begin_inset space ~
28861 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28863 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28868 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28875 in this document is:
28876 \begin_inset Newline newline
28881 dummy entry for the character
28886 \begin_inset Newline newline
28898 \begin_inset space ~
28908 font use the command
28937 \begin_layout Standard
28938 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28943 \begin_inset space \space{}
28947 \begin_inset Newline newline
28963 \begin_inset Newline newline
28966 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28967 This command will make the font of all symbols
28974 \begin_inset space ~
28982 \begin_layout Standard
28983 If the characters |
28984 \begin_inset space \space{}
28988 \begin_inset space \space{}
28992 \begin_inset space \space{}
28996 \begin_inset space \space{}
29000 \begin_inset space \space{}
29003 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29004 a quote character in front of them.
29005 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29006 LatexCommand nomenclature
29007 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29008 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29015 \begin_layout Subsection
29016 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29017 \begin_inset Index idx
29020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29021 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29029 \begin_layout Standard
29030 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29031 -code of the symbol
29033 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29035 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29038 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29039 LatexCommand nomenclature
29041 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29048 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29052 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29053 LatexCommand nomenclature
29056 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29061 They will be sorted by
29062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29088 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29091 will be sorted before the
29095 since the character
29096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29103 is considered in sorting.
29106 \begin_layout Standard
29107 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29110 \begin_inset space ~
29115 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29116 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29118 For the example given, you can insert
29122 in this field for the
29123 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29130 will be located before
29131 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29143 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29152 \begin_layout Subsection
29153 Nomenclature Options
29154 \begin_inset Index idx
29157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29158 Nomenclature ! Options
29166 \begin_layout Standard
29171 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29172 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29175 \begin_layout Description
29176 refeq Appends the phrase
29177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29192 to every nomenclature entry, where
29198 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29201 \begin_layout Description
29202 refpage Appends the phrase
29203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29218 to every nomenclature entry, where
29224 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29227 \begin_layout Description
29228 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29231 \begin_layout Standard
29232 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29233 class options list in the
29235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29239 In this document the options
29246 \begin_layout Standard
29247 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29254 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29255 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29260 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29263 \begin_layout Description
29273 \begin_layout Description
29276 nomrefpage Like the
29283 \begin_layout Description
29286 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29295 \begin_layout Description
29299 \begin_inset space ~
29305 \begin_inset space ~
29310 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29313 \begin_layout Standard
29315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29322 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29323 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29327 \begin_layout Standard
29335 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29338 \begin_inset Newline newline
29345 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29350 \begin_inset Newline newline
29354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29369 by their translation.
29372 \begin_layout Subsection
29373 Printing the Nomenclature
29374 \begin_inset Index idx
29377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29378 Nomenclature ! Printing
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29390 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29406 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29407 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29408 You can choose between these settings:
29411 \begin_layout Description
29412 Default a space of 1
29413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29419 \begin_layout Description
29421 \begin_inset space ~
29425 \begin_inset space ~
29428 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29431 \begin_layout Description
29432 Custom custom space
29435 \begin_layout Standard
29436 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29445 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29453 For example, in order to change the name to
29457 , add the following line to the preamble:
29460 \begin_layout Standard
29468 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29471 \begin_layout Subsection
29472 Nomenclature Program
29473 \begin_inset Index idx
29476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29477 Nomenclature ! Program
29483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29485 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29492 \begin_layout Standard
29498 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29499 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29501 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29506 by adding options, see section
29507 \begin_inset space ~
29511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29513 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29518 The available options are listed and explained in
29519 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29521 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29528 \begin_layout Section
29530 \begin_inset Index idx
29533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29540 \begin_inset Index idx
29543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29544 Document ! Branches
29550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29552 name "sec:Branches"
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29560 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29561 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29562 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29563 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29567 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29568 allows you to put text into branches.
29569 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29570 To create a branch, either select the menu
29572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29573 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29576 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29585 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29586 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29587 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29588 and whether the name of the branch should
29589 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29590 (see below for an example).
29591 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29592 to the name of the other) and to add
29593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29605 \begin_inset space ~
29608 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29609 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29613 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29614 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29619 where you can choose a branch.
29620 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29624 \begin_layout Standard
29625 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29626 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29629 \begin_layout Standard
29630 \begin_inset Branch Question
29633 \begin_layout Standard
29634 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29642 \begin_layout Standard
29643 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29646 \begin_layout Standard
29647 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29655 \begin_layout Standard
29662 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29663 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29666 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29667 Consider for example a file
29668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29675 which has the above branches.
29677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29684 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29708 branch were inactive,
29709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29724 branch was active, likewise
29725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29740 branch was active, and
29741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29744 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29748 if both branches were active.
29749 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29753 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29759 \begin_layout Standard
29760 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29761 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29762 definitions for each branch.
29763 For example you can define for the question branch
29767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29768 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29769 -syntax, see section
29770 \begin_inset space ~
29774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29776 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29798 \begin_layout Standard
29808 \begin_layout Standard
29809 and for the answer branch
29812 \begin_layout Standard
29822 \begin_layout Standard
29832 \begin_layout Standard
29833 \begin_inset Branch Question
29836 \begin_layout Standard
29840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29868 \begin_layout Standard
29869 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29904 \begin_layout Standard
29905 Now it is possible to use the
29909 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29916 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29919 commands to obtain conditional output.
29920 Here is an example formula where only the
29927 \begin_inset Formula
29929 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29946 \begin_layout Standard
29947 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29953 \begin_inset space \space{}
29956 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29958 For this advanced usage, see the
29963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29966 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29973 \begin_layout Section
29975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29977 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29982 \begin_inset Index idx
29985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29994 \begin_layout Standard
29997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29998 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30001 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30003 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30009 \begin_inset Index idx
30012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30014 -packages ! hyperref
30019 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30020 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30021 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30022 part of the document.
30026 \begin_layout Standard
30027 The header information in the dialog tab
30031 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30032 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30033 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30034 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30038 \begin_inset space ~
30042 \begin_inset space ~
30047 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30048 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30049 and author entries.
30053 \begin_inset space ~
30057 \begin_inset space ~
30061 \begin_inset space ~
30066 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30069 \begin_layout Standard
30070 You can specify in the dialog tab
30074 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30079 \begin_inset space ~
30083 \begin_inset space ~
30087 \begin_inset space ~
30092 option allows long links to be split;
30095 \begin_inset space ~
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30103 \begin_inset space ~
30111 \begin_inset space ~
30116 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30119 \begin_inset space ~
30124 colors the different links.
30125 The default colors are:
30128 \begin_layout Labeling
30129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30134 for hyperlinks and URLs
30137 \begin_layout Labeling
30138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30146 \begin_layout Labeling
30147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30155 \begin_layout Standard
30156 but you can change these in the field
30161 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30167 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30170 \begin_layout Standard
30175 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30176 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30177 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30185 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30186 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30187 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30197 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30198 when opening the PDF.
30200 \begin_inset space ~
30203 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30204 \begin_inset space ~
30207 1 will only display the sections.
30210 \begin_layout Standard
30211 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30212 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30218 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30219 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30228 \begin_layout Section
30230 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30234 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30241 \begin_layout Subsection
30244 \begin_inset Index idx
30247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30257 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30264 \begin_layout Standard
30265 As \SpecialChar LyX
30266 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30267 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30268 commands and constructs,
30271 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30272 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30273 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30274 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30275 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30276 cannot support all packages and
30280 \begin_layout Standard
30281 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30282 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30283 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30287 Code box is created by the menu
30289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30291 \begin_inset space ~
30296 or by the toolbar button
30309 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30317 \begin_layout Standard
30318 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30320 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30322 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30323 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30330 , you can write the command part
30336 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30337 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30341 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30342 Code box behind the word.
30343 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30344 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30348 \begin_layout Standard
30349 \begin_inset Graphics
30350 filename clipart/ERT.png
30358 \begin_layout Standard
30362 \begin_layout Standard
30363 This is a line with a
30367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30390 \begin_layout Standard
30391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30399 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30400 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30401 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30402 know that the command is finished.
30410 \begin_layout Subsection
30411 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30413 \begin_inset Argument 1
30416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30417 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30424 \begin_inset Index idx
30427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30437 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30446 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30447 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30448 uses in the background.
30449 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30450 is based on commands, you can
30451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30459 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30460 any time if you know the right commands.
30461 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30462 is the end of the day.
30463 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30464 all caption labels bold.
30465 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30467 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30471 \begin_layout Standard
30472 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30474 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30476 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30488 \begin_layout Standard
30489 As result you find that the package
30494 \begin_inset Index idx
30497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30499 -packages ! caption
30505 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30510 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30514 \begin_inset space ~
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30527 usepackage[options]{package name}
30530 \begin_layout Standard
30531 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30532 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30533 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30534 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30537 \begin_layout Standard
30538 In your case the package name is
30543 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30548 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30549 So you add the command
30552 \begin_layout Standard
30557 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30560 \begin_layout Standard
30561 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30566 For more commands provided by the
30570 package, have a look at its documentation,
30571 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30585 \begin_layout Standard
30586 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30588 For example if you use a
30592 class, you don't need the package
30596 , you can instead write
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30604 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30611 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30612 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30619 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30622 \begin_layout Standard
30623 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30624 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30626 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30627 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30628 Code box as described in the previous
30632 \begin_layout Standard
30633 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30634 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30637 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30639 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30646 \begin_layout Standard
30647 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 \begin_inset Note Note
30670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30679 \begin_layout Left Header
30680 \begin_inset Argument 1
30683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30703 \begin_inset Note Note
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30707 defines the header line as described below
30715 \begin_layout Center Header
30716 \begin_inset Argument 1
30719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30728 \begin_layout Right Header
30729 \begin_inset Argument 1
30732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30753 \begin_layout Left Footer
30754 \begin_inset Argument 1
30757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 \begin_layout Center Footer
30779 \begin_inset Argument 1
30782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30794 \begin_inset Newline newline
30798 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30804 \begin_layout Right Footer
30805 \begin_inset Argument 1
30808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30830 \begin_layout Section
30831 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30834 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30839 \begin_inset Index idx
30842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30843 Document ! Header/Footer line
30849 \begin_inset Index idx
30852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30861 \begin_layout Standard
30862 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30866 \begin_inset space ~
30877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30883 \begin_inset space ~
30889 As a second step add in the menu
30891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30892 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30899 Custom Header/Footerlines
30900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30904 This module offers the following 6
30905 \begin_inset space ~
30911 \begin_layout Description
30913 \begin_inset space ~
30917 \begin_inset space ~
30921 \begin_inset space ~
30925 \begin_inset space ~
30929 \begin_inset space ~
30935 \begin_layout Description
30937 \begin_inset space ~
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30945 \begin_inset space ~
30949 \begin_inset space ~
30953 \begin_inset space ~
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30963 \begin_layout Standard
30964 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30965 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30967 \begin_inset space ~
30971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30973 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30977 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30980 \begin_layout Standard
30981 \begin_inset Float figure
30987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30990 \begin_inset Tabular
30991 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30992 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30993 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30995 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31026 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31044 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31055 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31059 The normal text on the page goes here.
31060 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31062 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31063 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31068 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31077 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31088 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31106 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31135 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31158 name "fig:Page-layout"
31162 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31175 \begin_layout Standard
31176 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31184 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31188 \begin_inset space ~
31193 is set to “Default”.
31194 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31203 \begin_layout Subsection
31207 \begin_layout Standard
31208 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31209 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31210 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31211 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31213 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31214 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31217 \begin_layout Standard
31218 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31219 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31225 \begin_inset space ~
31233 \begin_layout Description
31236 thepage prints the current page number
31239 \begin_layout Description
31242 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31245 \begin_layout Description
31248 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31251 \begin_layout Description
31254 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31255 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31262 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31265 because it usually goes in a left header.
31268 \begin_layout Description
31271 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31272 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31274 It is normally used in the right header.
31277 \begin_layout Subsection
31278 Default header/footer
31281 \begin_layout Standard
31282 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31283 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31284 footer has the page number.
31285 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31286 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31287 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31290 \begin_inset space ~
31298 \begin_layout Subsection
31302 \begin_layout Standard
31303 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31304 Some pages are different.
31305 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31306 a new part or chapter in your book.
31307 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31308 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31309 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31313 Header and footer decoration line
31316 \begin_layout Standard
31317 By default, you get a 0.4
31318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31321 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31322 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31334 in the following way:
31337 \begin_layout Standard
31344 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31347 \begin_layout Standard
31348 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31357 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31364 \begin_layout Standard
31365 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31367 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31368 \begin_inset space ~
31372 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31382 Several header/footer lines
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31386 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31387 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31388 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31390 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31406 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31419 \begin_inset space ~
31427 \begin_layout Standard
31434 headheight}{height}
31437 \begin_layout Standard
31438 where height is a size in standard units.
31439 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31440 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31441 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31442 logfile with the menu
31444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31450 \begin_inset space ~
31455 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31460 \begin_inset Index idx
31463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 -packages ! fancyhdr
31471 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31472 for your header/footer.
31475 \begin_layout Subsection
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31481 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31482 This example consists of the following definition:
31485 \begin_layout Description
31487 \begin_inset space ~
31496 , empty optional argument
31499 \begin_layout Description
31501 \begin_inset space ~
31504 Header empty, empty optional argument
31507 \begin_layout Description
31509 \begin_inset space ~
31518 in the optional argument
31521 \begin_layout Description
31523 \begin_inset space ~
31532 in the optional argument
31535 \begin_layout Description
31537 \begin_inset space ~
31550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31554 \begin_inset Newline newline
31558 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31565 in the optional argument
31568 \begin_layout Description
31570 \begin_inset space ~
31579 , empty optional argument
31582 \begin_layout Description
31585 headrulewidth set to 2
31586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31593 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31594 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31600 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31609 \begin_layout Standard
31610 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31616 \begin_layout Standard
31620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31624 pagestyle{headings}
31630 \begin_inset Note Note
31633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31634 switches back to page style with the default headings
31642 \begin_layout Section
31643 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31646 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31651 \begin_inset Index idx
31654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 \begin_inset Index idx
31664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31673 \begin_layout Standard
31675 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31676 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31677 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31680 \begin_layout Subsection
31684 \begin_layout Standard
31685 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31691 \begin_inset Index idx
31694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31696 -packages ! preview-latex
31701 (on some systems named simply
31706 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31708 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31714 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31716 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31724 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31725 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31726 -package are automatically
31727 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31731 \begin_layout Subsection
31735 \begin_layout Standard
31736 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31737 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31739 activate the option
31742 \begin_inset space ~
31749 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31755 \begin_inset space ~
31759 \begin_inset space ~
31762 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31769 \begin_inset space ~
31782 \begin_inset space ~
31787 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31790 \begin_layout Standard
31791 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31796 \begin_inset space ~
31804 \begin_inset space ~
31812 \begin_layout Standard
31813 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31814 and when you finish
31818 \begin_layout Standard
31819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31827 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31828 generated by activating the option
31831 \begin_inset space ~
31837 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31845 \begin_layout Subsection
31846 Selected document parts
31849 \begin_layout Standard
31850 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31851 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31852 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31853 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31855 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31857 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31861 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31862 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31863 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31866 \begin_layout Standard
31867 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31874 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31886 is explained in section
31888 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31893 \begin_inset space ~
31903 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31904 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31905 the final rotated boxes,
31906 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31907 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31909 Here is the result:
31912 \begin_layout Standard
31913 \begin_inset Preview
31915 \begin_layout Standard
31920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31924 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31930 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31940 height_special "totalheight"
31945 backgroundcolor "none"
31948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31973 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31979 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32001 \begin_layout Standard
32002 Previewing works also for colors.
32003 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 is explained in section
32029 \begin_inset space ~
32042 \begin_layout Standard
32043 \begin_inset Preview
32045 \begin_layout Standard
32049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32068 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32073 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32092 \begin_layout Standard
32093 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32099 \begin_layout Standard
32100 If \SpecialChar LyX
32101 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32102 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32103 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32104 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32105 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32106 the \SpecialChar TeX
32108 If \SpecialChar LyX
32109 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32110 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32112 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32113 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32114 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32117 \begin_layout Subsection
32122 \begin_layout Standard
32123 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32124 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32127 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32129 \begin_inset space ~
32134 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32136 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32138 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32139 's main window, then only this selection
32140 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32141 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32142 the source view window.
32147 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32148 ; but note that if you have
32149 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32151 not just the one which is open at the time.
32154 \begin_layout Section
32155 Advanced Find and Replace
32156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32158 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32163 \begin_inset Index idx
32166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 \begin_inset Index idx
32176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32185 \begin_layout Subsection
32189 \begin_layout Standard
32190 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32191 allows for searching of complex,
32192 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32194 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32195 The key-features are:
32198 \begin_layout Itemize
32199 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32200 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32201 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32205 \begin_layout Itemize
32206 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32207 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32208 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32209 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32212 \begin_layout Itemize
32213 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32214 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32215 outside of mathematics environments
32218 \begin_layout Itemize
32219 Search may be widened to a specific
32224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32228 \begin_inset space ~
32231 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32232 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32239 \begin_layout Itemize
32240 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32241 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32246 \begin_inset space ~
32249 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32252 \begin_layout Subsection
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32259 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32272 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32275 ) or the toolbar button
32278 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32284 Advanced Find and Replace
32289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32293 \begin_layout Standard
32299 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32303 \begin_inset space ~
32308 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32311 arg "paragraph-break"
32315 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32316 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32320 arg "paragraph-break"
32323 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32327 searches backwards.
32330 \begin_layout Standard
32334 \begin_inset space ~
32339 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32348 \begin_inset space ~
32353 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32357 Searching for mathematics
32360 \begin_layout Standard
32361 Mathematical formulas, such as
32362 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32365 or something more complex like
32366 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32369 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32374 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32375 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32376 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32377 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32387 \begin_layout Standard
32388 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32389 This is done by switching to the
32393 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32398 This way, entering in the
32405 \begin_layout Itemize
32406 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32407 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32410 \begin_layout Itemize
32411 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32412 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32415 \begin_layout Itemize
32416 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32417 of it only within section headings.
32418 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32419 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32423 \begin_layout Itemize
32424 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32425 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32433 The entries made in the
32437 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32440 \begin_inset space ~
32446 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32450 button or alternatively press
32453 arg "paragraph-break"
32460 while the cursor is in the
32463 \begin_inset space ~
32471 \begin_layout Standard
32472 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32474 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32478 \begin_layout Itemize
32479 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32480 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32488 with its typewriter version
32489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32503 \begin_layout Itemize
32504 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32510 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32522 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32529 (you may want to enable the
32532 \begin_inset space ~
32540 \begin_inset space ~
32545 options and disable the
32553 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32561 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32562 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32566 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32569 , or occurrences of
32570 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32574 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32580 \begin_layout Subsection
32584 \begin_layout Standard
32585 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32590 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32592 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32594 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32603 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32609 This is done with the context menu
32611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32612 Insert Regular Expression
32614 while the cursor is in the
32619 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32620 expression matching rules
32624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32625 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32632 \begin_inset space ~
32635 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32636 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32642 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32643 same text in the document.
32644 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32645 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32648 \begin_layout Enumerate
32649 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32654 editor the fraction
32655 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32659 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32662 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32663 fractions with the given denominator.
32666 \begin_layout Enumerate
32667 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32679 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32684 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32685 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32686 Also, by inserting a
32687 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32690 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32691 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32696 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32697 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32700 , and referring back to them through
32701 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32705 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32709 For example, try searching with the regexp
32710 \begin_inset Newline newline
32713 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32716 \begin_inset Newline newline
32719 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32723 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32726 \begin_layout Standard
32727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32735 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32736 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32737 sub-expressions is absolute.
32739 \begin_inset space ~
32743 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32746 always refers to the first occurrence of
32747 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32750 in all entered regexps.
32758 \begin_layout Section
32760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32762 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32767 \begin_inset Index idx
32770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32779 \begin_layout Standard
32781 has a built-in spell checker.
32784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32791 key or the toolbar button
32794 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32797 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32798 beginning of the currently selected text.
32799 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32800 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32801 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32802 scrolled so that it is visible.
32803 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32804 n, if any could be found.
32805 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32809 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32810 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32813 \begin_layout Standard
32814 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32817 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32821 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32822 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32824 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32825 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32828 \begin_inset space ~
32836 arg "dialog-show character"
32839 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32841 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32844 \begin_layout Standard
32845 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32846 can be downloaded from here:
32847 \begin_inset Newline newline
32851 \begin_inset Flex URL
32854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32856 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32862 \begin_inset Newline newline
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32869 files for each language.
32870 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32874 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32875 's installation subfolder
32883 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32885 \begin_inset Newline newline
32888 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32889 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32890 but in most cases these are
32906 is the language code.
32909 \begin_layout Subsection
32913 \begin_layout Standard
32916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32917 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32919 \begin_inset space ~
32922 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32925 you can set the following things:
32928 \begin_layout Description
32930 \begin_inset space ~
32933 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32934 should use for spell checking.
32935 Depending on your platform,
32949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32950 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32951 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32966 \begin_inset space ~
32969 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32972 \begin_layout Description
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32977 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32978 will always use the given language
32979 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32982 \begin_layout Description
32984 \begin_inset space ~
32987 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32993 \begin_inset space \space{}
32997 This should normally not be needed.
33000 \begin_layout Description
33002 \begin_inset space ~
33006 \begin_inset space ~
33009 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33021 \begin_layout Description
33023 \begin_inset space ~
33026 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33027 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33028 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33029 appear in a context menu.
33030 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33034 \begin_layout Description
33036 \begin_inset space ~
33040 \begin_inset space ~
33044 \begin_inset space ~
33047 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33051 \begin_layout Section
33053 \begin_inset Index idx
33056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33065 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33074 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33075 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33087 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33096 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33098 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33099 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33100 which are available for many languages.
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33104 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33105 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33109 \begin_layout Subsection
33110 Setting up the thesaurus
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33122 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33126 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33131 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33137 \begin_inset space ~
33145 For instance, the US English files are named:
33148 \begin_layout Itemize
33152 \begin_layout Itemize
33156 \begin_layout Standard
33165 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33166 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33169 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33170 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33171 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33173 \begin_inset space ~
33178 ) to the path where they are installed.
33182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33183 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33184 ies, typical locations are
33190 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33194 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33198 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33201 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33207 LibreOffice-<Version>
33214 On the Mac, the default location is
33216 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33217 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33218 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33219 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33220 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33221 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33229 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33230 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33231 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33235 \begin_layout Standard
33236 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33237 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33241 \begin_layout Itemize
33242 \begin_inset Flex URL
33245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33247 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33256 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33257 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33259 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33260 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33261 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33268 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33270 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33271 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33275 \begin_layout Standard
33276 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33278 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33281 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33287 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33290 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33291 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33299 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33300 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33301 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33303 \begin_inset space ~
33308 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33311 \begin_layout Subsection
33312 Using the thesaurus
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33316 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33318 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33321 or the toolbar button
33324 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33327 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33329 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33331 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33332 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33333 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33342 ), related terms (such as
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33354 ), compounds (such as
33357 \begin_inset space ~
33366 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33375 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33379 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33380 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33384 \begin_layout Standard
33385 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33386 the dictionary, such as the above
33390 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33395 \begin_inset space \space{}
33398 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33399 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33400 For example, looking up the word form
33404 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33409 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33414 \begin_inset space \space{}
33425 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33426 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33427 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33430 \begin_layout Section
33432 \begin_inset Index idx
33435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33442 \begin_inset Index idx
33445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33446 Document ! Change Tracking
33452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33454 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33463 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33464 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33465 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33469 \begin_inset space ~
33472 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_layout Standard
33483 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33497 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33498 You can change the color in
33500 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33501 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33512 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33518 \begin_inset Index idx
33521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33522 Color ! Change tracking
33527 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33528 's status bar when the
33529 cursor is in changed text.
33530 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33533 arg "changes-merge"
33539 \begin_layout Standard
33540 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33542 \begin_inset Index idx
33545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 \begin_layout Standard
33555 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33561 \begin_layout Standard
33562 \begin_inset Graphics
33563 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33571 \begin_layout Standard
33572 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33578 \begin_layout Standard
33579 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33583 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 \begin_inset Tabular
33591 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33592 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33593 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33594 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 arg "changes-track"
33612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33620 \begin_inset space ~
33623 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33625 \begin_inset space ~
33634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33643 arg "changes-output"
33651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33662 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33672 \begin_inset space ~
33681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 Jumps to the next change
33708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33717 arg "change-accept"
33725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33736 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33756 arg "change-reject"
33764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33775 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33777 \begin_inset space ~
33786 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33795 arg "changes-merge"
33803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33814 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33816 \begin_inset space ~
33825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 arg "all-changes-accept"
33842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33850 \begin_inset space ~
33853 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33855 \begin_inset space ~
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 arg "all-changes-reject"
33885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33893 \begin_inset space ~
33896 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33898 \begin_inset space ~
33902 \begin_inset space ~
33911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33935 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33937 \begin_inset space ~
33946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33969 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33971 \begin_inset space ~
33987 \begin_layout Standard
33988 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33995 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34017 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34018 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34019 the next change after the current cursor position.
34020 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34021 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34022 step to the next change.
34023 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34026 \begin_layout Standard
34027 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34028 to describe a change.
34031 \begin_layout Standard
34032 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34038 \begin_inset Index idx
34041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 -packages ! dvipost
34049 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34051 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34057 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34061 \begin_layout Section
34062 Comparison of Documents
34063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34065 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34070 \begin_inset Index idx
34073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34074 Comparison of documents
34082 \begin_layout Standard
34083 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34086 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34090 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34091 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34093 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34095 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34136 \begin_inset space ~
34141 enables the change tracking option
34144 \begin_inset space ~
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset space ~
34157 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34160 \begin_layout Section
34161 International Support
34162 \begin_inset Index idx
34165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34166 International support
34174 \begin_layout Standard
34175 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34176 with any language you want.
34177 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34178 up \SpecialChar LyX
34180 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34182 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34189 \begin_layout Standard
34190 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34191 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34192 \begin_inset space ~
34196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34198 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34205 \begin_layout Subsection
34207 \begin_inset Index idx
34210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34217 \begin_inset Index idx
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34221 Document ! Settings
34227 \begin_inset Index idx
34230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34231 Document ! Language
34239 \begin_layout Standard
34242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34243 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34246 dialog lets you set
34248 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34253 \begin_layout Standard
34258 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34268 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34269 For details about the different encoding options see section
34270 \begin_inset space ~
34274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34276 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34283 \begin_layout Subsection
34284 Keyboard mapping configuration
34285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34287 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34295 If you have for example a U.
34296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34299 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34300 can use an alternate keymap.
34301 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34306 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34307 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34308 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34311 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34312 \begin_inset space ~
34316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34318 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34323 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34324 which one you want to use.
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34328 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34329 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34330 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34334 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34335 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34336 one to support the characters you want.
34337 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34344 \begin_layout Chapter
34347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34349 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34358 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34359 topic inside the user's guide.
34362 \begin_layout Section
34364 \begin_inset Index idx
34367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34381 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34384 \begin_layout Subsection
34388 \begin_layout Standard
34389 Creates a new document.
34392 \begin_layout Subsection
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34398 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34399 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34402 \begin_layout Subsection
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34410 \begin_layout Subsection
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34415 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34416 Click there on a file to open it.
34419 \begin_layout Subsection
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34424 Closes the current document.
34427 \begin_layout Subsection
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 Closes all opened documents.
34435 \begin_layout Subsection
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34440 Saves the actual document.
34443 \begin_layout Subsection
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34448 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34451 \begin_layout Subsection
34455 \begin_layout Standard
34456 Saves all opened documents.
34459 \begin_layout Subsection
34463 \begin_layout Standard
34464 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34467 \begin_layout Subsection
34471 \begin_layout Standard
34472 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34473 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34474 It is described in the section
34476 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34481 Additional Features
34486 \begin_layout Subsection
34490 \begin_layout Standard
34491 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34492 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34494 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34495 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34500 When using the menu entry
34503 \begin_inset space ~
34508 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34512 \begin_inset space ~
34516 \begin_inset space ~
34520 \begin_inset space ~
34525 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34526 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34529 \begin_layout Subsection
34531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34533 name "subsec:Export"
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 You can export your document to various file formats.
34542 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34544 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34545 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34546 during its configuration.
34549 \begin_layout Standard
34550 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34552 \begin_inset space ~
34556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34558 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34565 \begin_layout Description
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34574 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34576 \begin_inset space ~
34579 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34580 \begin_inset Newline newline
34583 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34584 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34588 \begin_layout Description
34589 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34595 \begin_layout Description
34597 \begin_inset space ~
34600 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34606 \begin_layout Description
34607 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34608 's native DVI-format.
34609 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34610 files paths or file names in your document.
34612 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34619 \begin_layout Description
34620 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34621 in files paths or file names
34624 \begin_layout Description
34626 \begin_inset space ~
34633 ) DVI-format using the program
34635 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34638 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34642 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34650 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34658 \begin_layout Description
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34663 (cropped) the same as
34667 but with cropped page margins.
34670 \begin_layout Description
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34675 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34679 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34684 \begin_layout Description
34688 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34696 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34704 \begin_layout Description
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34713 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34717 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34725 \begin_layout Description
34729 \begin_inset space ~
34738 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34739 source that is compilable with the program
34741 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34745 \begin_layout Description
34749 \begin_inset space ~
34754 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34755 source, additionally all images used in the document
34756 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34760 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34763 \begin_layout Description
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34772 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34773 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34774 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34782 \begin_layout Description
34786 \begin_inset space ~
34795 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34796 source that is compilable with the program
34802 \begin_layout Description
34804 \begin_inset space ~
34808 \begin_inset space ~
34815 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34816 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34822 \begin_layout Description
34824 \begin_inset space ~
34827 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34828 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34834 \begin_inset space \space{}
34839 \begin_inset space ~
34843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34858 represent the version number)
34861 \begin_layout Description
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34870 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34871 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34872 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34876 \begin_layout Description
34877 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34878 's internal XHTML engine
34881 \begin_layout Description
34882 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34887 \begin_layout Description
34888 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34890 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34893 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34897 \begin_layout Description
34899 \begin_inset space ~
34902 (cropped) the same as
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34910 but with cropped page margins
34913 \begin_layout Description
34917 \begin_inset space ~
34922 PDF-format using the program
34926 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34929 \begin_layout Description
34933 \begin_inset space ~
34937 \begin_inset space ~
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34950 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34955 \begin_inset space \space{}
34958 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34962 \begin_layout Description
34966 \begin_inset space ~
34971 PDF-format using the program
34973 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34976 , produces PDF-files directly
34979 \begin_layout Description
34983 \begin_inset space ~
34988 PDF-format using the program
34992 , produces PDF-files directly
34995 \begin_layout Description
34999 \begin_inset space ~
35004 PDF-format using the program
35008 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35011 \begin_layout Description
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35020 PDF-format using the program
35025 , produces PDF-files directly
35028 \begin_layout Description
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_layout Description
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35053 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35054 and then exported as text using the program
35059 \begin_layout Description
35064 PostScript format using the program
35069 \begin_layout Description
35070 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35071 source and also code in the statistical programming
35085 it is possible to use
35089 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35094 If one of the menu entries
35101 \begin_inset space ~
35110 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35112 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35114 \begin_inset space ~
35118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35120 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35125 \begin_inset Index idx
35128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35129 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35138 \begin_layout Subsection
35142 \begin_layout Standard
35143 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35144 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35147 \begin_inset space ~
35151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35153 reference "sec:Paths"
35158 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35167 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35168 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35169 's preferences as described in section
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35176 reference "subsec:Converters"
35183 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 New and Close Window
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35188 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35192 \begin_layout Subsection
35196 \begin_layout Standard
35197 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35200 \begin_layout Section
35202 \begin_inset Index idx
35205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35214 \begin_layout Subsection
35218 \begin_layout Standard
35219 Described in section
35220 \begin_inset space ~
35224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35226 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35233 \begin_layout Subsection
35234 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35237 \begin_layout Standard
35238 Described in section
35239 \begin_inset space ~
35243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35245 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35252 \begin_layout Subsection
35256 \begin_layout Standard
35257 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35258 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35261 \begin_layout Subsection
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 Selects the whole document.
35269 \begin_layout Subsection
35270 Find & Replace (Quick)
35273 \begin_layout Standard
35274 Described in section
35275 \begin_inset space ~
35279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35281 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35288 \begin_layout Subsection
35289 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35292 \begin_layout Standard
35293 Described in section
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35300 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35307 \begin_layout Subsection
35308 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35311 \begin_layout Standard
35312 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35316 \begin_layout Subsection
35320 \begin_layout Standard
35321 Described in section
35322 \begin_inset space ~
35326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35328 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35335 \begin_layout Subsection
35337 \begin_inset Index idx
35340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35341 Paragraph ! Settings
35349 \begin_layout Standard
35350 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35351 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35355 \begin_layout Standard
35356 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35357 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35363 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35364 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35366 \begin_inset space ~
35374 \begin_layout Subsection
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35380 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35381 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35386 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35388 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35389 The properties of tables are described in section
35390 \begin_inset space ~
35394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35396 reference "sec:Tables"
35400 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35401 \begin_inset space ~
35405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35407 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35414 \begin_layout Subsection
35415 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35418 \begin_layout Standard
35419 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35421 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35422 \begin_inset space ~
35426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35428 reference "sec:Nesting"
35433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35435 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35442 \begin_layout Subsection
35445 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35448 \begin_layout Standard
35449 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35450 nts of the same type.
35452 \begin_inset space ~
35456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35458 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35462 for an explanation.
35465 \begin_layout Section
35467 \begin_inset Index idx
35470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35480 At the bottom of the
35484 menu the opened documents are listed.
35487 \begin_layout Subsection
35488 Open/Close all Insets
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35492 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35495 \begin_layout Subsection
35496 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35500 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35504 Math macros are described in the
35511 \begin_layout Subsection
35515 \begin_layout Standard
35516 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35517 \begin_inset space ~
35521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35523 reference "sec:Navigating"
35528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35530 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35537 \begin_layout Subsection
35541 \begin_layout Standard
35542 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35544 \begin_inset space ~
35548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35550 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35557 \begin_layout Subsection
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35562 Opens a window showing console messages.
35563 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35565 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35568 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35569 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35570 is processing the document.
35573 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35577 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35582 \begin_inset Index idx
35585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35594 \begin_layout Standard
35595 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35596 All toolbars and the
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35604 can be turned on and off.
35609 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35638 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35642 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35654 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35658 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35659 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35660 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35661 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35662 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35667 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35668 \begin_inset space ~
35672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35674 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35681 \begin_layout Subsection
35685 \begin_layout Standard
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset space ~
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35705 \begin_inset space ~
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35714 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35715 's main window vertically while
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset space ~
35730 \begin_inset space ~
35734 \begin_inset space ~
35738 \begin_inset space ~
35743 will split it horizontally.
35744 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35745 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35746 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35747 three or more documents at the same time.
35748 To close a split view, use the menu
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35755 \begin_inset space ~
35763 \begin_layout Subsection
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35768 Closes a split view.
35771 \begin_layout Subsection
35775 \begin_layout Standard
35776 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35777 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35778 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35779 's main window fullscreen.
35780 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35781 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35784 \begin_layout Section
35786 \begin_inset Index idx
35789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35798 \begin_layout Subsection
35802 \begin_layout Standard
35803 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35810 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35821 \begin_layout Subsection
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35825 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35833 Here you can insert the following characters:
35836 \begin_layout Description
35841 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35844 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35845 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35846 -packages you have installed.
35847 You can get a complete display by checking
35850 \begin_inset space ~
35856 \begin_inset Newline newline
35860 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35868 Not all characters will be visible in the
35872 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35880 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35884 ) can display every character.
35892 \begin_layout Description
35893 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35897 \begin_layout Description
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35903 \begin_inset space ~
35906 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35907 \begin_inset space ~
35911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35913 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35920 \begin_layout Description
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35925 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35935 \begin_layout Description
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35940 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35944 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35950 \begin_layout Description
35952 \begin_inset space ~
35955 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35959 \begin_layout Description
35961 \begin_inset space ~
35964 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35968 \begin_layout Description
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35973 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35979 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35985 \begin_layout Description
35987 \begin_inset space ~
35990 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35994 \begin_layout Description
35996 \begin_inset space ~
36000 \begin_inset Index idx
36003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36010 \begin_inset Index idx
36013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36014 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36019 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36020 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36022 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36028 \begin_inset Index idx
36031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36039 \begin_inset Newline newline
36042 More information about this feature can be found in the
36048 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36054 \begin_layout Subsection
36058 \begin_layout Standard
36059 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36062 \begin_layout Description
36063 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36064 \begin_inset script superscript
36066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 \begin_layout Description
36076 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36077 \begin_inset script subscript
36079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36088 \begin_layout Description
36090 \begin_inset space ~
36093 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36094 \begin_inset space ~
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36100 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36107 \begin_layout Description
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36112 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36119 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36126 \begin_layout Description
36128 \begin_inset space ~
36131 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36138 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36145 \begin_layout Description
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36150 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36156 \begin_inset space \space{}
36159 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36160 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36169 To insert a fraction use the command
36174 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36178 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36187 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36194 \begin_layout Description
36196 \begin_inset space ~
36199 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36213 \begin_layout Description
36215 \begin_inset space ~
36218 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36225 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36232 \begin_layout Description
36234 \begin_inset space ~
36237 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36238 \begin_inset space ~
36242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36244 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36251 \begin_layout Description
36252 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36259 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36266 \begin_layout Description
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36271 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36272 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36278 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36285 \begin_layout Description
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36290 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36291 \begin_inset space ~
36295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36297 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36304 \begin_layout Description
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36310 \begin_inset space ~
36313 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36314 \begin_inset space ~
36318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36320 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36327 \begin_layout Description
36329 \begin_inset space ~
36332 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36333 as described in section
36334 \begin_inset space ~
36338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36340 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36347 \begin_layout Description
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36352 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36359 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36366 \begin_layout Description
36368 \begin_inset space ~
36371 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36372 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36374 \begin_inset space ~
36378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36380 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36387 \begin_layout Description
36389 \begin_inset space ~
36392 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36393 \begin_inset space ~
36397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36399 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36406 \begin_layout Description
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36415 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36422 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36429 \begin_layout Subsection
36433 \begin_layout Standard
36434 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36459 are described in section
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36466 reference "sec:toc"
36475 is described in section
36476 \begin_inset space ~
36480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36482 reference "sec:Index"
36490 is described in section
36491 \begin_inset space ~
36495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36497 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36503 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36506 is described in section
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36513 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36520 \begin_layout Subsection
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36525 To insert floats, as described in section
36526 \begin_inset space ~
36530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36532 reference "sec:Floats"
36536 and in detail the chapter
36543 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_layout Subsection
36555 \begin_layout Standard
36556 To insert notes, described in section
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36563 reference "sec:Notes"
36570 \begin_layout Subsection
36574 \begin_layout Standard
36575 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36577 Branches are described in section
36578 \begin_inset space ~
36582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36584 reference "sec:Branches"
36591 \begin_layout Subsection
36595 \begin_layout Standard
36596 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36597 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36599 An example is the document class
36600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36607 with three custom insets.
36610 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36614 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36620 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36623 \begin_layout Subsection
36625 \begin_inset Index idx
36628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36637 \begin_layout Standard
36638 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36640 For more information see chapter
36642 External Document Parts
36645 \begin_inset space ~
36651 \begin_layout Subsection
36653 \begin_inset Index idx
36656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36665 \begin_layout Standard
36666 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36667 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 \begin_layout Standard
36691 dialog as described in section
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36698 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36705 \begin_layout Subsection
36709 \begin_layout Standard
36714 as described in section
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36721 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
36732 \begin_layout Standard
36737 as described in section
36738 \begin_inset space ~
36742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36744 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36753 \begin_inset Index idx
36756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36763 \begin_inset Index idx
36766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36767 Longtables ! Caption
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36777 Floats are described in section
36778 \begin_inset space ~
36782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36784 reference "sec:Floats"
36788 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36795 \begin_inset space ~
36803 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36815 reference "sec:Index"
36822 \begin_layout Subsection
36826 \begin_layout Standard
36827 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36828 \begin_inset space ~
36832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36834 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36841 \begin_layout Subsection
36845 \begin_layout Standard
36846 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36847 Tables are described in section
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36854 reference "sec:Tables"
36858 and in detail in the chapter
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_layout Subsection
36877 \begin_layout Standard
36883 Graphics are described in section
36884 \begin_inset space ~
36888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36890 reference "sec:Graphics"
36897 \begin_layout Subsection
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36902 Inserts a URL as described in section
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36909 reference "subsec:URLs"
36916 \begin_layout Subsection
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36921 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36922 \begin_inset space ~
36926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36928 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36935 \begin_layout Subsection
36939 \begin_layout Standard
36940 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36941 \begin_inset space ~
36945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36947 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36959 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36966 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36979 title or caption of a float.
36980 Inserts a short title as described in section
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36987 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36994 \begin_layout Subsection
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37000 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37001 Code box as described in section
37002 \begin_inset space ~
37006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37008 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37015 \begin_layout Subsection
37017 \begin_inset Index idx
37020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37029 \begin_layout Standard
37030 Inserts a program listings box.
37031 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37033 Program Code Listings
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37046 \begin_layout Subsection
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 Inserts the actual date.
37052 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37056 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37072 \begin_layout Subsection
37076 \begin_layout Standard
37077 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37078 \begin_inset space ~
37082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37084 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37091 \begin_layout Section
37093 \begin_inset Index idx
37096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37106 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37110 of the current document.
37111 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37114 \begin_layout Subsection
37118 \begin_layout Standard
37119 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37120 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37121 to jump, for example, between section
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37126 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37130 2.5 and use the submenu
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_inset space ~
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37160 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37164 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37170 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37173 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37181 \begin_inset space ~
37186 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37194 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37197 \begin_layout Subsection
37198 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37201 \begin_layout Standard
37202 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37210 \begin_layout Standard
37211 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37212 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37213 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37221 \begin_inset space ~
37229 \begin_layout Subsection
37233 \begin_layout Standard
37234 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37237 The \SpecialChar LyX
37238 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37253 manual for a detailed description.
37256 \begin_layout Section
37258 \begin_inset Index idx
37261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37270 \begin_layout Subsection
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 Change Tracking is described in section
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37282 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37289 \begin_layout Subsection
37297 \begin_layout Standard
37298 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37299 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37300 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37302 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37303 to the clipboard or update the view.
37304 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37308 \begin_layout Subsection
37309 Start Appendix Here
37312 \begin_layout Standard
37313 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37314 as described in section
37315 \begin_inset space ~
37319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37321 reference "sec:Appendices"
37328 \begin_layout Subsection
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37336 \begin_layout Standard
37337 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37338 default output format for the document (menu
37340 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37341 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37342 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37360 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37364 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37367 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37368 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37373 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37378 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset space ~
37390 \begin_inset space ~
37394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37396 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37400 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37401 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37404 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37409 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37414 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37424 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37429 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37430 when it is first configured.
37431 The default output format is
37434 \begin_inset space ~
37442 \begin_layout Subsection
37443 View (Other Formats)
37446 \begin_layout Standard
37447 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37448 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37449 actual document with an external program.
37450 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37451 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37452 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37454 All possible formats are listed in section
37455 \begin_inset space ~
37459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37461 reference "subsec:Export"
37466 You should at least see the menu entry
37471 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37473 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37481 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37486 \begin_inset Index idx
37489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37490 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37499 \begin_layout Standard
37500 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37501 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37504 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37509 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37514 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37524 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37529 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37530 when it is first configured.
37533 \begin_layout Subsection
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37541 \begin_layout Standard
37542 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37543 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37546 \begin_layout Subsection
37547 Update (Other Formats)
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37552 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37555 \begin_layout Subsection
37556 View Master Document
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37581 manual for more information on this topic).
37582 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37583 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37596 generates the output of the whole book, while
37600 will just output the chapter alone.
37603 \begin_layout Standard
37604 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37605 in the document settings (menu
37607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37608 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37609 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37611 \begin_inset space ~
37615 \begin_inset space ~
37621 \begin_inset space ~
37625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37627 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37631 ) or in the preferences (menu
37633 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37634 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37636 \begin_inset space ~
37639 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37644 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37646 \begin_inset space ~
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37662 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37669 \begin_layout Subsection
37670 Update Master Document
37673 \begin_layout Standard
37674 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37695 manual for more information on this topic).
37696 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37697 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37702 in the document settings (menu
37704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37705 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37706 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37724 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37728 ) or in the preferences (menu
37730 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37731 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37733 \begin_inset space ~
37736 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37741 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37747 \begin_inset space ~
37753 \begin_inset space ~
37757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37759 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37766 \begin_layout Subsection
37768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37770 name "subsec:Compressed"
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 Un/compresses the current document.
37779 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37780 compression (see the
37782 Additional Features
37784 manual for details).
37787 \begin_layout Subsection
37791 \begin_layout Standard
37792 The document settings are described in appendix
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37799 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37806 \begin_layout Section
37808 \begin_inset Index idx
37811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37820 \begin_layout Subsection
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 Spell checking is explained in section
37826 \begin_inset space ~
37830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37832 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37839 \begin_layout Subsection
37843 \begin_layout Standard
37844 The thesaurus is described in section
37845 \begin_inset space ~
37849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37851 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37858 \begin_layout Subsection
37860 \begin_inset Index idx
37863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 \begin_inset Index idx
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37883 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37884 the highlighted document part.
37887 \begin_layout Subsection
37893 \begin_inset Index idx
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 Generates with the help of the program
37909 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37912 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37913 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37914 This feature is not available on Windows.
37917 \begin_layout Subsection
37923 \begin_inset Index idx
37926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37936 \begin_layout Standard
37937 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37942 \begin_inset space ~
37947 to see the full filename paths.
37950 \begin_layout Subsection
37952 \begin_inset Index idx
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37964 \begin_layout Standard
37965 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37966 files as described in section
37967 \begin_inset space ~
37971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37973 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37980 \begin_layout Subsection
37982 \begin_inset Index idx
37985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37998 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38016 \begin_inset Index idx
38019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38020 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38029 \begin_layout Standard
38030 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38031 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38032 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38033 -packages and programs it needs; see
38035 \begin_inset space ~
38039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38041 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38048 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38057 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38058 \begin_inset space ~
38062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38064 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38071 \begin_layout Section
38073 \begin_inset Index idx
38076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38087 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38089 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38093 \begin_layout Standard
38098 \begin_inset space ~
38103 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38104 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38105 packages and classes found
38106 by \SpecialChar LyX
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38114 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38125 \begin_inset space ~
38130 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38135 \begin_layout Section
38137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38139 name "sec:Toolbars"
38146 \begin_layout Standard
38147 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38154 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38161 \begin_layout Standard
38162 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38163 This is described in the
38165 Additional Features
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38172 \begin_inset Index idx
38175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 \begin_layout Standard
38185 \begin_inset Graphics
38186 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38195 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38202 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38219 \begin_inset Note Note
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38223 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38228 manual for more information.
38236 \begin_layout Standard
38237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38243 \begin_layout Standard
38244 \begin_inset Tabular
38245 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38246 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38254 \begin_inset Graphics
38255 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38269 pull-down box for the environments
38282 \begin_layout Standard
38283 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38289 \begin_layout Standard
38291 \begin_inset Tabular
38292 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38293 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38294 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38295 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38319 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38349 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38379 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38395 arg "dialog-show print"
38403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38409 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38425 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38439 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38529 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38559 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38605 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38638 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38645 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38687 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38701 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38702 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38730 Emphasize text, function of the
38732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38737 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38767 Set text to noun style, function of the
38769 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38771 \begin_inset space ~
38774 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 arg "textstyle-apply"
38800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38804 Format text using the current settings in the
38806 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38808 \begin_inset space ~
38811 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38844 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38864 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38892 arg "tabular-insert"
38900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38906 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38922 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 Toggle outline window on/off,
38936 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38964 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38970 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38991 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39004 \begin_layout Subsection
39006 \begin_inset Index idx
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39018 \begin_layout Standard
39019 \begin_inset Graphics
39020 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39035 \begin_layout Standard
39036 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39040 \begin_layout Standard
39041 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39047 \begin_layout Standard
39048 \begin_inset Tabular
39049 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39050 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39051 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39052 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39089 arg "layout Enumerate"
39097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39116 arg "layout Itemize"
39124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 arg "layout Description"
39178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 arg "depth-increment"
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39211 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39213 \begin_inset space ~
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39235 arg "depth-decrement"
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39249 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39264 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39273 arg "float-insert figure"
39281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39288 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39295 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39304 arg "float-insert table"
39312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39319 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39365 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39395 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39441 \begin_inset space ~
39450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39459 arg "nomencl-insert"
39467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39493 arg "footnote-insert"
39501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39539 \begin_inset space ~
39548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39572 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39686 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39701 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39717 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39732 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39752 arg "dialog-show character"
39760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39766 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39768 \begin_inset space ~
39771 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39787 arg "layout-paragraph"
39795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39803 \begin_inset space ~
39812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39821 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39835 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39849 \begin_layout Subsection
39850 View/Update Toolbar
39851 \begin_inset Index idx
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39855 Toolbar ! View / Update
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39864 \begin_inset Graphics
39865 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39873 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39879 \begin_layout Standard
39880 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39884 \begin_layout Standard
39885 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39892 \begin_inset Tabular
39893 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39894 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39895 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39896 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39897 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39927 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 arg "buffer-update"
39944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39966 arg "master-buffer-view"
39974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40000 arg "master-buffer-update"
40008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 \begin_inset space ~
40020 \begin_inset space ~
40029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40038 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40054 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40055 Synchronize with Output
40061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40066 \begin_inset Graphics
40067 filename ../images/view-others.png
40069 groupId toolbarbuttons
40080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40086 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40087 View (Other Formats)
40093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40098 \begin_inset Graphics
40099 filename ../images/update-others.png
40101 groupId toolbarbuttons
40110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40117 Update (Other Formats)
40130 \begin_layout Standard
40131 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40135 \begin_layout Subsection
40139 \begin_layout Standard
40140 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40147 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40151 , the table toolbar
40152 \begin_inset Index idx
40155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40169 manual and the math macro toolbar
40170 \begin_inset Index idx
40173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40186 \begin_layout Chapter
40187 The Document Settings
40188 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40190 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40195 \begin_inset Index idx
40198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40199 Document ! Settings
40207 \begin_layout Standard
40211 \begin_inset space ~
40216 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40217 is called with the menu
40219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40223 You can save your document settings as default with the
40225 Save as Document Defaults
40227 button in any dialog.
40228 This will create a template named
40232 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40233 when you create a new document without
40237 \begin_layout Standard
40242 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40243 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40246 \begin_layout Standard
40247 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40248 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40249 to find the one you are looking for.
40250 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40251 the submenus of the dialog.
40253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40257 \begin_inset space \space{}
40261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40268 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40269 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40270 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40273 \begin_layout Section
40277 \begin_layout Standard
40278 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40280 Document classes are described in section
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40287 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40295 \begin_layout Standard
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40304 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40309 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40310 as a layout for a document class.
40311 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40313 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40322 \begin_layout Standard
40323 Some classes use special class options by default.
40324 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40328 and you can decide to use them or not.
40329 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40330 recommended you leave them untouched.
40335 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40336 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40341 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40343 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40349 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40350 \begin_inset Newline newline
40355 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40358 \begin_inset Newline newline
40361 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40362 distribution, see section
40367 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40369 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40381 \begin_layout Standard
40386 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40387 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40388 in the background if the child document
40389 is opened without its master.
40390 This way child documents are always compilable.
40391 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_layout Standard
40407 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40418 \begin_inset Index idx
40421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40423 -packages ! prettyref
40429 \begin_inset Index idx
40432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40434 -packages ! refstyle
40439 for cross-references, see section
40440 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40446 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40453 \begin_layout Section
40457 \begin_layout Standard
40458 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40459 Please refer to the section
40462 \begin_inset space ~
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40475 manual for details.
40478 \begin_layout Section
40482 \begin_layout Standard
40483 Modules are explained in section
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40490 reference "subsec:Modules"
40497 \begin_layout Section
40501 \begin_layout Standard
40503 \begin_inset space ~
40507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40509 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40516 \begin_layout Section
40520 \begin_layout Standard
40521 The document font settings are described in section
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40528 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40535 \begin_layout Section
40539 \begin_layout Standard
40540 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40557 and whether it should be a
40560 \begin_inset space ~
40565 can also be specified here.
40568 \begin_layout Standard
40569 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40570 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40571 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40573 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40576 \begin_layout Standard
40579 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40582 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40583 justifies the text on screen.
40584 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40588 \begin_layout Section
40592 \begin_layout Standard
40593 This dialog is described in sections
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40600 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40607 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40614 \begin_layout Section
40618 \begin_layout Standard
40619 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40620 \begin_inset space ~
40624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40626 reference "subsec:Margins"
40633 \begin_layout Section
40635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40637 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40642 \begin_inset Index idx
40645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40646 Language ! Encoding
40654 \begin_layout Standard
40655 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40656 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40657 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40659 is always encoded in utf8).
40660 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40661 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40662 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40663 -command is not known for
40664 a particular character).
40667 \begin_layout Standard
40668 If you use the option
40673 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40674 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40675 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40677 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40678 exactly one encoding.
40679 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40682 \begin_layout Standard
40684 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40685 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40686 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40687 installation supports Unicode), choose
40688 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40689 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40690 is quite incomplete, so
40691 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40696 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40697 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40698 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40699 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40700 -commands is not used, because all
40701 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40702 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40703 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40704 , two new alternative engines
40705 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40707 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40709 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40740 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40745 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40749 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40752 \begin_layout Standard
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40761 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40762 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40772 The possible settings are:
40775 \begin_layout Description
40776 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40779 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40789 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40796 \begin_layout Description
40797 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40798 format you will use.
40799 In many cases this will be
40804 \begin_inset Index idx
40807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40815 If the newer package
40820 \begin_inset Index idx
40823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40825 -packages ! polyglossia
40830 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40831 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40832 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40834 this package will be used instead of
40841 \begin_layout Description
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40854 would be more appropriate.
40857 \begin_layout Description
40858 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40859 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40863 (for German texts), type in
40866 \begin_inset Newline newline
40871 usepackage{ngerman}
40874 \begin_layout Description
40875 None will not use a language package.
40876 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40879 \begin_layout Standard
40880 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40883 \begin_layout Description
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40893 \begin_inset space ~
40900 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40906 \begin_inset Index idx
40909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40911 -packages ! inputenc
40917 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40918 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40919 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40923 \begin_layout Description
40924 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40926 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40927 commands, which may result in a big
40928 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40929 -commands are needed.
40932 \begin_layout Description
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40941 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40944 \begin_layout Description
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40953 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40961 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40964 \begin_layout Description
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_inset space ~
40973 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40974 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40977 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40986 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40990 \begin_layout Description
40992 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset space ~
40999 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41000 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41003 \begin_layout Description
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41016 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41023 \begin_layout Description
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41029 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_inset space ~
41036 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41037 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41040 \begin_layout Description
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41046 \begin_inset space ~
41049 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41050 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41051 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41052 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_layout Description
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41072 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41073 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41074 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41076 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41087 \begin_layout Description
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41096 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41099 \begin_layout Description
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41108 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41111 \begin_layout Description
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41120 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41123 \begin_layout Description
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41128 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41131 \begin_layout Description
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41136 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41139 \begin_layout Description
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41148 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41151 \begin_layout Description
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41157 \begin_inset space ~
41163 \begin_layout Description
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41172 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41175 \begin_layout Description
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41187 \begin_layout Description
41189 \begin_inset space ~
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41196 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41202 \begin_inset Index idx
41205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41212 , when using this, set the document language to
41217 \begin_layout Description
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41226 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41231 , when using this, set the document language to
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41240 \begin_layout Description
41242 \begin_inset space ~
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41249 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41255 \begin_inset Index idx
41258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 -packages ! japanese
41265 , when using this, set the document language to
41270 \begin_layout Description
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41276 \begin_inset space ~
41279 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41284 , when using this, set the document language to
41289 \begin_layout Description
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41298 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41303 , when using this, set the document language to
41308 \begin_layout Description
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41313 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41316 \begin_layout Description
41318 \begin_inset space ~
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41329 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41332 \begin_layout Description
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41338 \begin_inset space ~
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41345 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41346 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41347 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41350 \begin_layout Description
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41362 \begin_layout Description
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41371 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41372 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41375 \begin_layout Description
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41381 \begin_inset space ~
41384 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41390 \begin_inset Index idx
41393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41400 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41403 \begin_layout Description
41405 \begin_inset space ~
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41416 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41423 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41426 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41433 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41434 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41436 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41439 \begin_layout Description
41441 \begin_inset space ~
41445 \begin_inset space ~
41448 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41454 \begin_inset Index idx
41457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41464 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41467 \begin_layout Description
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41472 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41478 \begin_inset Index idx
41481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 -packages ! inputenc
41489 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41493 \begin_layout Description
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41506 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_layout Description
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41526 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41527 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41528 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41532 \begin_layout Description
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41545 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41546 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41549 \begin_layout Section
41551 \begin_inset Index idx
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41561 \begin_inset Index idx
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41571 \begin_inset Index idx
41574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41575 Color ! Shaded boxes
41581 \begin_inset Index idx
41584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41585 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41593 \begin_layout Standard
41594 Here you can alter the font color for the
41598 (default: black), for
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41606 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41610 (default: white) and for
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41623 sets the color back to the default.
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41627 Clicking any button showing
41635 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41636 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41637 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41638 later more quickly.
41641 \begin_layout Standard
41642 Note, if you change the
41645 \begin_inset space ~
41650 font color and use the option
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41658 in the document settings under
41661 \begin_inset space ~
41666 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41667 \begin_inset space ~
41671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41673 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41680 \begin_layout Standard
41681 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41700 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41706 Code after a forced page break:
41709 \begin_layout Itemize
41710 For the page color:
41711 \begin_inset Newline newline
41718 pagecolor{color name}
41721 \begin_layout Itemize
41722 For the text color:
41723 \begin_inset Newline newline
41733 \begin_layout Standard
41734 You are restricted to one of
41770 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41783 \begin_inset Newline newline
41786 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41787 names to refer to them:
41790 \begin_layout Itemize
41796 \begin_inset Newline newline
41801 page_backgroundcolor
41804 \begin_layout Itemize
41808 \begin_inset space ~
41814 \begin_inset Newline newline
41822 \begin_layout Itemize
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset Newline newline
41840 \begin_layout Itemize
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_inset Newline newline
41858 \begin_layout Standard
41859 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41862 \begin_inset space ~
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41878 \begin_layout Section
41882 \begin_layout Standard
41883 Here you can adjust the
41887 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41891 as described in section
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41898 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41905 \begin_layout Section
41909 \begin_layout Standard
41910 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41916 \begin_inset Index idx
41919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41931 \begin_inset Index idx
41934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41936 -packages ! jurabib
41944 Sectioned bibliography
41946 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41952 \begin_inset Index idx
41955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41957 -packages ! bibtopic
41962 and you can select a
41966 for the generation of the bibliography.
41967 For a further description see section
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41974 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41981 \begin_layout Section
41985 \begin_layout Standard
41986 Here you can define the
41990 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41992 \begin_inset space ~
41996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41998 reference "sec:Index"
42005 \begin_layout Section
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42010 The PDF properties are explained in section
42011 \begin_inset space ~
42015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42017 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42024 \begin_layout Section
42028 \begin_layout Standard
42029 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42030 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42036 \begin_inset Index idx
42039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 -packages ! amsmath
42051 \begin_inset Index idx
42054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42056 -packages ! amssymb
42066 \begin_inset Index idx
42069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42081 \begin_inset Index idx
42084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42096 \begin_inset Index idx
42099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42101 -packages ! mathdots
42111 \begin_inset Index idx
42114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42116 -packages ! mathtools
42126 \begin_inset Index idx
42129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42141 \begin_inset Index idx
42144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42146 -packages ! stackrel
42156 \begin_inset Index idx
42159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42161 -packages ! stmaryrd
42171 \begin_inset Index idx
42174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 -packages ! undertilde
42181 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42184 \begin_layout Description
42185 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42186 -errors in formulas,
42187 ensure that you have this enabled.
42190 \begin_layout Description
42191 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42192 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42193 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42197 \begin_layout Description
42198 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42201 \begin_inset space ~
42213 \begin_layout Description
42214 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42217 \begin_inset space ~
42229 \begin_layout Description
42230 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42241 \begin_layout Description
42242 mathtools is used for the math commands
42278 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42285 \begin_layout Description
42286 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42288 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42297 \begin_layout Description
42298 stackrel is used for the math command
42315 \begin_layout Description
42316 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42319 \begin_layout Description
42320 undertilde is used for the math command
42328 Accents for one Character
42337 \begin_layout Section
42341 \begin_layout Standard
42342 The float placement options are described in the section
42345 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_inset space ~
42361 \begin_layout Section
42365 \begin_layout Standard
42366 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42368 Program Code Listings
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42381 \begin_layout Section
42385 \begin_layout Standard
42386 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42394 set to be used and set the
42399 The itemize environment is described in section
42400 \begin_inset space ~
42404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42406 reference "sec:Itemize"
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 You can furthermore specify a
42417 \begin_inset space ~
42422 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42423 command of the desired character.
42424 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42431 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42437 \begin_inset space \space{}
42441 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42451 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42452 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42455 \begin_layout Standard
42456 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42464 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42465 -packages in the preamble (menu
42468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42469 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42472 \begin_inset space ~
42478 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42482 usepackage{textcomp}
42485 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42489 usepackage{amssymb}
42499 \begin_layout Section
42503 \begin_layout Standard
42504 Branches are described in section
42505 \begin_inset space ~
42509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42511 reference "sec:Branches"
42518 \begin_layout Section
42520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42522 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42533 \begin_layout Description
42535 \begin_inset space ~
42539 \begin_inset space ~
42542 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42562 View Master Document
42563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42570 Update Master Document
42571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42578 menu or the toolbar.
42579 The default is set in
42581 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42582 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42587 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42597 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42604 \begin_layout Description
42606 \begin_inset space ~
42610 \begin_inset space ~
42613 Output settings for the menu
42615 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42617 \begin_inset space ~
42623 For a detailed description see section
42625 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42630 \begin_inset space ~
42638 \begin_layout Description
42640 \begin_inset space ~
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42647 Options offers settings for the export format
42655 \begin_inset space ~
42660 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42661 \begin_inset space ~
42664 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42673 settings are described in detail in section
42675 Math Output in XHTML
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42689 \begin_inset space ~
42693 \begin_inset space ~
42698 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42701 \begin_layout Section
42709 \begin_layout Standard
42710 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42712 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42714 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42716 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42720 \begin_layout Standard
42721 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42722 -syntax is given in section
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42729 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42736 \begin_layout Chapter
42742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42744 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42749 \begin_inset Index idx
42752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42761 \begin_layout Standard
42762 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42764 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42768 It has the following submenus.
42771 \begin_layout Section
42775 \begin_layout Subsection
42779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42780 User Interface File
42781 \begin_inset Index idx
42784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42785 Customization ! of toolbars
42791 \begin_inset Index idx
42794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42795 Customization ! of menus
42803 \begin_layout Standard
42804 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42805 interface (ui) file.
42806 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42814 \begin_layout Description
42819 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42822 \begin_layout Description
42829 the menu entries in popup context menus
42832 \begin_layout Description
42837 specifies the toolbar buttons
42840 \begin_layout Standard
42841 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42842 and edit the entries.
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42846 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42858 entries must be finished with an explicit
42883 and in the case of the
42884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42896 The syntax for the entries is:
42899 \begin_layout Standard
42900 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42929 \begin_layout Standard
42931 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42934 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42935 -functions are listed in the menu
42937 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42939 \begin_inset space ~
42947 \begin_layout Standard
42948 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42954 \begin_layout Standard
42955 For example, assuming you use the menu
42957 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42960 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42964 \begin_layout Standard
42965 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42991 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43006 to have the sixth bookmark.
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43013 \begin_inset space ~
43018 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43019 's toolbar buttons.
43020 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43024 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43038 Enable tool tips in main work area
43040 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43048 \begin_layout Standard
43053 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43054 should display in the menu
43056 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43058 \begin_inset space ~
43066 \begin_layout Subsection
43070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43074 \begin_layout Standard
43077 Restore window layouts and geometries
43080 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43081 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43085 \begin_layout Standard
43088 Restore cursor positions
43090 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43094 \begin_layout Standard
43097 Load opened files from last session
43099 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43103 \begin_layout Standard
43106 Clear all session information
43108 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43109 sessions (cursor positions, names
43110 of last opened documents, etc.).
43113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43117 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43122 \begin_inset Index idx
43125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 \begin_layout Standard
43137 Backup original documents when saving
43139 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43140 it was saved the last time.
43141 It is stored in the
43144 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43156 reference "sec:Paths"
43160 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43169 The backup file has the file extension
43170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43184 \begin_layout Standard
43187 Backup documents, every
43189 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43192 \begin_layout Standard
43195 Save documents compressed by default
43197 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43198 \begin_inset space ~
43202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43204 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43209 This applies to newly created documents only.
43210 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43214 Windows & work area
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43220 Open documents in tabs
43222 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43226 \begin_layout Standard
43231 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43244 reference "sec:Paths"
43248 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43255 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43256 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43257 of \SpecialChar LyX
43259 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43260 instance is created for each file.
43263 \begin_layout Standard
43266 Single close-tab button
43268 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43271 \begin_inset Graphics
43272 filename ../images/closetab.png
43279 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43280 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43283 \begin_layout Standard
43284 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43292 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43293 before the change takes effect.
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43306 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43308 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43310 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43314 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43315 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43316 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43319 \begin_layout Subsection
43321 \begin_inset Index idx
43324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43333 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43340 \begin_layout Standard
43341 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43345 \begin_layout Standard
43346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43354 This section only deals with the fonts
43358 the \SpecialChar LyX
43360 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43363 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43364 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43375 \begin_layout Standard
43376 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43393 (depends on the system) as its
43396 \begin_inset space ~
43412 \begin_layout Standard
43413 You can change the font size with the
43420 \begin_layout Standard
43425 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43430 points have the size of 1
43431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43435 \begin_inset space ~
43439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43441 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43446 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43451 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43458 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43465 \begin_layout Standard
43468 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43470 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43471 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43472 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43473 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43474 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43476 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43477 \begin_inset space ~
43483 \begin_layout Subsection
43485 \begin_inset Index idx
43488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43489 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43496 \begin_inset Index idx
43499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43508 \begin_layout Standard
43509 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43510 by choosing an item in the
43511 list and selecting the
43518 \begin_layout Standard
43519 By checking the option
43523 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43526 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43536 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43539 \begin_layout Subsection
43541 \begin_inset Index idx
43544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43553 \begin_layout Standard
43554 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43558 \begin_layout Standard
43563 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43564 This feature is described in section
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43571 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43578 \begin_layout Standard
43579 Checking the option
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43586 \begin_inset space ~
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43595 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43598 \begin_layout Section
43600 \begin_inset Index idx
43603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43612 \begin_layout Subsection
43616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43623 Cursor follows scrollbar
43625 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43629 \begin_layout Standard
43630 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43631 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43632 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43635 \begin_layout Standard
43638 Scroll below end of document
43640 is self-explanatory.
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43644 In \SpecialChar LyX
43645 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43652 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43654 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43655 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43658 \begin_layout Standard
43661 Sort environments alphabetically
43663 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43666 \begin_layout Standard
43669 Group environments by their category
43671 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43674 \begin_layout Standard
43679 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43694 \begin_layout Standard
43695 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43700 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43701 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43705 \begin_layout Subsection
43707 \begin_inset Index idx
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43717 \begin_inset Index idx
43720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43721 Settings ! Shortcuts
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43734 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43736 Several binding files are available, among them:
43739 \begin_layout Description
43740 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43743 \begin_layout Description
43744 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43756 \begin_layout Description
43757 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43768 \begin_layout Standard
43769 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43774 , and binding files for special languages.
43775 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43780 \begin_inset space \space{}
43784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43792 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43793 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43794 will try to use the appropriate binding
43798 \begin_layout Standard
43799 Some binding files, like
43803 , only have a limited scope.
43804 When looking at the end of the file
43808 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43811 \begin_layout Standard
43815 \begin_inset space ~
43819 \begin_inset space ~
43824 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43825 in the selected key binding file.
43828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43832 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43837 \begin_inset Index idx
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43841 Key Bindings ! Editing
43849 \begin_layout Standard
43850 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43851 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43852 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43853 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43856 Show key-bindings containing
43859 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43860 Insert there for example as keyword
43861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43868 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43869 functions that contain
43870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43878 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43879 All \SpecialChar LyX
43880 functions are also listed in the file
43885 that you will find in the
43892 \begin_layout Standard
43893 For example, to add the shortcut
43901 , select the function and press the
43906 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43907 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43911 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43912 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43914 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43915 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43917 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43922 \begin_layout Standard
43923 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43926 \begin_layout Standard
43927 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43929 The syntax of the entries is:
43932 \begin_layout Standard
43938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43957 \begin_layout Subsection
43959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43961 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43966 \begin_inset Index idx
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43976 \begin_inset Index idx
43979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43980 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43988 \begin_layout Standard
43989 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43990 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43991 provides keyboard maps.
43992 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43993 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43996 \begin_inset space ~
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44005 and select the keyboard map file named
44012 \begin_layout Standard
44021 keyboard map and, if you use the
44025 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44028 arg "keymap-primary"
44034 arg "keymap-secondary"
44037 respectively or toggle between them with
44040 arg "keymap-toggle"
44046 \begin_layout Standard
44047 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44055 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44064 \begin_layout Standard
44065 You can also specify the mouse
44067 Wheel scrolling speed
44070 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44074 \begin_layout Standard
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44091 you can select a key for zooming.
44092 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44095 \begin_layout Subsection
44099 \begin_layout Standard
44100 Input completion is described in section
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44107 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44114 \begin_layout Section
44116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44123 \begin_inset Index idx
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44133 \begin_inset Index idx
44136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 \begin_layout Standard
44146 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44147 are normally determined during
44149 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44152 \begin_layout Description
44154 \begin_inset space ~
44157 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44158 's working directory.
44159 It is the default when you
44170 \begin_inset space ~
44178 \begin_layout Description
44180 \begin_inset space ~
44183 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44185 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44191 \begin_inset space ~
44199 \begin_layout Description
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44204 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44210 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44214 \begin_inset Newline newline
44218 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44231 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44239 \begin_layout Description
44241 \begin_inset space ~
44245 \begin_inset Index idx
44248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44254 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44255 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44256 \begin_inset space ~
44260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44262 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44270 will be used to save the backups.
44271 \begin_inset Newline newline
44274 Backup files have the ending
44275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44285 \begin_layout Description
44287 \begin_inset space ~
44290 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44291 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44293 \begin_inset Newline newline
44300 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44306 You can edit this file with the program
44315 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44316 in its preferences under
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44325 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44330 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44332 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44333 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44339 and \SpecialChar LyX
44340 need to be running the same time.
44341 \begin_inset Newline newline
44344 The pipe is also used for the
44349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44355 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44360 \begin_inset Newline newline
44363 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44364 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44365 \begin_inset Newline newline
44381 \begin_layout Description
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44386 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44389 \begin_layout Description
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44394 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44395 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44396 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44399 \begin_layout Description
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44404 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44410 You only need to specify it if you are using
44414 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44416 For \SpecialChar LyX
44421 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44425 \begin_layout Description
44427 \begin_inset space ~
44430 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44431 When \SpecialChar LyX
44432 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44433 to find it on the system.
44434 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44436 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44445 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44446 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44449 \begin_layout Description
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44454 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44455 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44456 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44457 code or in the document
44459 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44461 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44462 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44463 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44464 scanned for the input files.
44465 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44466 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44468 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44469 compilation may fail for some documents.
44472 \begin_layout Section
44476 \begin_layout Standard
44477 Here you can insert your
44486 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44494 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44498 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44501 \begin_layout Section
44503 \begin_inset Index idx
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 Language ! Settings
44513 \begin_inset Index idx
44516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44517 Settings ! Language
44525 \begin_layout Subsection
44527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44529 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44536 \begin_layout Description
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44545 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44547 You can find its actual translation status here:
44548 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44550 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44557 \begin_layout Description
44559 \begin_inset space ~
44562 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44563 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44564 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44565 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44582 The most widespread language package is
44587 \begin_inset Index idx
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44597 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44599 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44600 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44601 come with the alternative
44607 \begin_inset Index idx
44610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44612 -packages ! polyglossia
44617 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44618 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44624 The available selections are described in section
44625 \begin_inset space ~
44629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44631 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44638 \begin_layout Description
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44643 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44644 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44645 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44646 An example is the start command
44652 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44654 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44658 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44673 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44678 \begin_layout Description
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44688 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44689 command toggles the package on and off.
44692 \begin_layout Description
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44698 \begin_inset space ~
44701 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44705 \begin_layout Description
44707 \begin_inset space ~
44711 \begin_inset space ~
44714 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44718 \begin_layout Description
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44724 \begin_inset space ~
44727 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44728 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44729 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44731 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44738 \begin_layout Description
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44743 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44745 When this option is not set, the
44748 \begin_inset space ~
44753 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44755 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44758 \begin_inset space ~
44766 \begin_layout Description
44768 \begin_inset space ~
44774 \begin_inset space ~
44780 When it is not set, the
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44788 is set to the end of the document.
44791 \begin_layout Description
44793 \begin_inset space ~
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44800 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44801 language will be underlined in blue.
44804 \begin_layout Description
44806 \begin_inset space ~
44810 \begin_inset space ~
44813 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44814 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44817 \begin_layout Description
44819 \begin_inset space ~
44822 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44823 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44824 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44825 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44828 \begin_layout Subsection
44832 \begin_layout Standard
44833 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44840 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44847 \begin_layout Section
44851 \begin_layout Subsection
44855 \begin_layout Description
44857 \begin_inset space ~
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44864 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44867 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44868 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44870 \begin_inset space ~
44876 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44879 \begin_layout Description
44881 \begin_inset space ~
44885 \begin_inset Index idx
44888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 \begin_inset Index idx
44898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44899 Settings ! Date format
44904 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44905 \begin_inset Newline newline
44909 \begin_inset Flex URL
44912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44914 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44920 \begin_inset Newline newline
44923 For example the format
44924 \begin_inset Newline newline
44928 \begin_inset Newline newline
44931 prints the date as day/month/year.
44934 \begin_layout Description
44936 \begin_inset space ~
44940 \begin_inset space ~
44943 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44944 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44947 \begin_layout Description
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44952 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44954 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44956 \begin_inset space ~
44962 For a detailed description see section
44964 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44977 \begin_layout Subsection
44983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44985 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44990 \begin_inset Index idx
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44994 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45003 \begin_layout Description
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45013 \begin_inset space ~
45017 \begin_inset space ~
45020 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45025 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45046 are used for Cyrillic.
45047 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45060 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45062 sets up in the background.
45063 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45066 \begin_layout Description
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45072 \begin_inset space ~
45075 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45080 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45084 \begin_layout Description
45086 \begin_inset space ~
45090 \begin_inset space ~
45094 \begin_inset space ~
45098 \begin_inset space ~
45101 options They only have an effect when the program
45105 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45108 \begin_layout Standard
45109 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45110 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45111 manuals of the applications.
45114 \begin_layout Description
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45119 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45120 \begin_inset space ~
45124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45126 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45133 \begin_layout Description
45135 \begin_inset space ~
45138 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45139 \begin_inset space ~
45143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45145 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45152 \begin_layout Description
45154 \begin_inset space ~
45157 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45158 \begin_inset space ~
45162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45164 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45171 \begin_layout Description
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45180 command Command for the program
45182 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45185 that is described in the section
45187 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45192 Additional Features
45197 \begin_layout Standard
45198 There are additionally the following options:
45201 \begin_layout Description
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45211 \begin_inset space ~
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45223 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45241 to separate folders.
45242 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45244 \begin_inset Index idx
45247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45254 \begin_inset Index idx
45257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45266 \begin_layout Description
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45288 \begin_inset space ~
45291 changes Removes all manually set
45297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45298 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45300 \begin_inset space ~
45305 dialog when changing the document class.
45308 \begin_layout Section
45310 \begin_inset space ~
45314 \begin_inset Index idx
45317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45326 \begin_layout Subsection
45328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45330 name "subsec:Converters"
45335 \begin_inset Index idx
45338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45347 \begin_layout Standard
45348 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45349 from one format to another.
45350 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45351 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45358 \begin_inset space ~
45363 field and press the
45368 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45377 drop-down list, modify the
45381 field and press the
45388 \begin_layout Standard
45391 Converter File Cache
45397 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45399 Maximum Age (in days
45402 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45403 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45406 \begin_layout Standard
45407 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45408 definition, is described in the section
45419 \begin_layout Subsection
45421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45423 name "sec:File-Formats"
45428 \begin_inset Index idx
45431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45438 \begin_inset Index idx
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45451 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45461 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45465 You can also define the
45467 Default output format
45469 that is used when you use
45471 View, Update, View Master Document
45475 Update Master Document
45481 menu or the toolbar.
45484 \begin_layout Standard
45485 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45496 \begin_layout Standard
45497 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45499 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45500 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45501 This is done by specifying a
45506 More about this is described in the section
45517 \begin_layout Chapter
45518 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45520 \begin_inset Index idx
45523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45532 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45539 \begin_layout Standard
45541 \begin_inset space ~
45545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45547 reference "tab:Units"
45551 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45552 and used in this documentation.
45555 \begin_layout Standard
45556 \begin_inset Float table
45562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45589 \begin_inset Tabular
45590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45591 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45727 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45800 scaled point (65536
45801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45879 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 % of original image width
45957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 \begin_layout Chapter
46270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46272 name "chap:Credits"
46279 \begin_layout Standard
46280 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46281 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46284 \begin_layout Itemize
46287 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46290 \begin_layout Itemize
46296 \begin_layout Itemize
46302 \begin_layout Itemize
46308 \begin_layout Itemize
46314 \begin_layout Itemize
46320 \begin_layout Itemize
46326 \begin_layout Itemize
46332 \begin_layout Itemize
46335 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46338 \begin_layout Itemize
46344 \begin_layout Itemize
46350 \begin_layout Itemize
46356 \begin_layout Itemize
46362 \begin_layout Itemize
46368 \begin_layout Itemize
46374 \begin_layout Itemize
46380 \begin_layout Itemize
46386 \begin_layout Itemize
46387 The \SpecialChar LyX
46389 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46398 \begin_layout Standard
46399 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46402 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46409 \begin_layout Bibliography
46410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46411 LatexCommand bibitem
46417 The \SpecialChar LyX
46419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46422 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46427 \begin_inset Newline newline
46431 \begin_inset Flex URL
46434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46436 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46444 \begin_layout Bibliography
46445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46446 LatexCommand bibitem
46447 key "latexcompanion"
46451 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46453 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46454 Companion Second Edition.
46457 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46460 \begin_layout Bibliography
46461 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46462 LatexCommand bibitem
46467 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46470 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46474 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46477 \begin_layout Bibliography
46478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46479 LatexCommand bibitem
46487 : A Document Preparation System.
46490 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46493 \begin_layout Bibliography
46494 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46495 LatexCommand bibitem
46504 The \SpecialChar TeX
46508 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46511 \begin_layout Bibliography
46512 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46513 LatexCommand bibitem
46518 The \SpecialChar TeX
46520 \begin_inset Newline newline
46524 \begin_inset Flex URL
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46537 \begin_layout Bibliography
46538 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46539 LatexCommand bibitem
46544 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46546 \begin_inset Newline newline
46550 \begin_inset Flex URL
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46563 \begin_layout Bibliography
46564 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46565 LatexCommand bibitem
46571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46573 name "Documentation"
46574 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46580 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46584 \begin_inset Newline newline
46588 \begin_inset Flex URL
46591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46593 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46601 \begin_layout Bibliography
46602 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46603 LatexCommand bibitem
46609 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46611 name "Documentation"
46612 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46616 how to use the program
46618 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46622 \begin_inset Newline newline
46626 \begin_inset Flex URL
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46631 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46639 \begin_layout Bibliography
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46641 LatexCommand bibitem
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46649 name "Documentation"
46650 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46659 \begin_inset Newline newline
46663 \begin_inset Flex URL
46666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46668 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46676 \begin_layout Bibliography
46677 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46678 LatexCommand bibitem
46679 key "makeindex-man"
46684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46687 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46696 \begin_inset Newline newline
46700 \begin_inset Flex URL
46703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46705 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46713 \begin_layout Bibliography
46714 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46715 LatexCommand bibitem
46721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46723 name "Documentation"
46724 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46733 \begin_inset Newline newline
46737 \begin_inset Flex URL
46740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46742 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46750 \begin_layout Bibliography
46751 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46752 LatexCommand bibitem
46758 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46760 name "Documentation"
46761 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46765 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46767 \begin_inset Newline newline
46771 \begin_inset Flex URL
46774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46776 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46784 \begin_layout Bibliography
46785 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46786 LatexCommand bibitem
46792 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46794 name "Documentation"
46795 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46799 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46805 \begin_inset Index idx
46808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46810 -packages ! caption
46816 \begin_inset Newline newline
46820 \begin_inset Flex URL
46823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46825 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46833 \begin_layout Bibliography
46834 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46835 LatexCommand bibitem
46841 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46843 name "Documentation"
46844 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46848 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46854 \begin_inset Index idx
46857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46859 -packages ! enumitem
46865 \begin_inset Newline newline
46869 \begin_inset Flex URL
46872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46874 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46882 \begin_layout Bibliography
46883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46884 LatexCommand bibitem
46890 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46892 name "Documentation"
46893 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46897 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46903 \begin_inset Index idx
46906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46908 -packages ! fancyhdr
46914 \begin_inset Newline newline
46918 \begin_inset Flex URL
46921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46923 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46931 \begin_layout Bibliography
46932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46933 LatexCommand bibitem
46939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46941 name "Documentation"
46942 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46946 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46952 \begin_inset Index idx
46955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46957 -packages ! hyperref
46963 \begin_inset Newline newline
46967 \begin_inset Flex URL
46970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46972 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46980 \begin_layout Bibliography
46981 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46982 LatexCommand bibitem
46988 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46990 name "Documentation"
46991 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46995 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47001 \begin_inset Index idx
47004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47006 -packages ! nomencl
47012 \begin_inset Newline newline
47016 \begin_inset Flex URL
47019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47021 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47029 \begin_layout Bibliography
47030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47031 LatexCommand bibitem
47037 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47039 name "Documentation"
47040 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47044 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47050 \begin_inset Index idx
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47055 -packages ! prettyref
47061 \begin_inset Newline newline
47065 \begin_inset Flex URL
47068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47078 \begin_layout Bibliography
47079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47080 LatexCommand bibitem
47086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47088 name "Documentation"
47089 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47093 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47099 \begin_inset Index idx
47102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47104 -packages ! refstyle
47110 \begin_inset Newline newline
47114 \begin_inset Flex URL
47117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47119 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47127 \begin_layout Bibliography
47128 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47129 LatexCommand bibitem
47135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47138 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47142 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47144 \begin_inset Newline newline
47148 \begin_inset Flex URL
47151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47153 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47161 \begin_layout Bibliography
47162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47163 LatexCommand bibitem
47169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47172 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47176 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47178 \begin_inset Newline newline
47182 \begin_inset Flex URL
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47187 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47195 \begin_layout Bibliography
47196 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47197 LatexCommand bibitem
47203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47206 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47210 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47211 for Cyrillic languages:
47212 \begin_inset Newline newline
47216 \begin_inset Flex URL
47219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47221 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47229 \begin_layout Bibliography
47230 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47231 LatexCommand bibitem
47237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47240 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47244 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47246 \begin_inset Newline newline
47250 \begin_inset Flex URL
47253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47255 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47263 \begin_layout Bibliography
47264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47265 LatexCommand bibitem
47271 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47274 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47278 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47280 \begin_inset Newline newline
47284 \begin_inset Flex URL
47287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47289 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47297 \begin_layout Bibliography
47298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47299 LatexCommand bibitem
47305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47308 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47312 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47314 \begin_inset Newline newline
47318 \begin_inset Flex URL
47321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47323 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47331 \begin_layout Bibliography
47332 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47333 LatexCommand bibitem
47339 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47342 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47346 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47348 \begin_inset Newline newline
47352 \begin_inset Flex URL
47355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47357 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47365 \begin_layout Bibliography
47366 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47367 LatexCommand bibitem
47373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47376 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47380 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47382 \begin_inset Newline newline
47386 \begin_inset Flex URL
47389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47391 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47399 \begin_layout Bibliography
47400 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47401 LatexCommand bibitem
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47410 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47414 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47416 \begin_inset Newline newline
47420 \begin_inset Flex URL
47423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47425 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47433 \begin_layout Bibliography
47434 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47435 LatexCommand bibitem
47441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47444 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47448 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47450 \begin_inset Newline newline
47454 \begin_inset Flex URL
47457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47459 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47467 \begin_layout Bibliography
47468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47469 LatexCommand bibitem
47475 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47478 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47482 about new features in
47488 \begin_inset Newline newline
47492 \begin_inset Flex URL
47495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47497 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47505 \begin_layout Standard
47506 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47540 \begin_inset Note Note
47543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47550 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47551 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47552 bibliography is the second one:
47560 \begin_layout Standard
47561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47562 LatexCommand bibtex
47563 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47564 options "biblio/alphadin"
47571 \begin_layout Standard
47572 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47576 \begin_layout Standard
47577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47578 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47584 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47585 LatexCommand printindex